2010 HUMMER H3/H3T Owner Manual M - Chevrolet HUMMER H3/H3T Owner Manual M Service and Maintenance...

2010 HUMMER H3/H3T Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Universal Remote System . . . . 5-26

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-33Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-41Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-44Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-52Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-60Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-81

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92

2010 HUMMER H3/H3T Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-8

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-11

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1

Introduction iii

HUMMER, the HUMMER Emblem,H3 and H3T are trademarks ofHUMMER LLC.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchaseor due to changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forHUMMER wherever it appears inthis manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 delangue françaisewww.helminc.com

Using this ManualTo quickly locate informationabout the vehicle use the Index inthe back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20935347 A First Printing ©2009 HUMMER LLC. All Rights Reserved.

iv Introduction

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage.This would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through itis a safety symbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not do this” or“Do not let this happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along with

the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control/StabiliTrak

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-8Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Sensing System for PassengerAirbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Washer and WiperSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Storage Compartments . . . . . . 1-15Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-17Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-18Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-18Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Automatic Transmission shown, Manual Transmission similar

In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑4.

B. Turn and Lane-Change Signalson page 6‑5 . WindshieldWiper/Washer on page 5‑2 .Cruise Control on page 9‑57.

C. Horn on page 5‑2.

D. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑7 .

E. Four-Wheel Drive on page 9‑46.

F. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑5 .

G. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑11.

H. Locking Rear Axle onpage 9‑54. Locking Front Axle(If Equipped) or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑52.

I. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 . Dome LampOverride. See Dome Lamps onpage 6‑7 . Instrument PanelIllumination Control onpage 6‑7 . Fog Lamps onpage 6‑6 .

J. Parking Brake on page 9‑51.

K. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑5.

L. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 .

M. Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3 (If Equipped).

N. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑52 (For vehicles withLocking Front Axle).

O. Off-Road Lamps on page 6‑6.

P. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑41or Manual Transmission onpage 9‑44.

Q. Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

R. Glove Box on page 4‑1.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

1-4 In Brief

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 9 m (30 feet) away fromthe vehicle.

Press UNLOCK to unlock thedriver door. Press again withinthree seconds to unlock allremaining doors.

Press LOCK to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

PressL to sound the horn andto flash the exterior lamps for30 seconds. PressL again tocancel the panic alarm.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Door LocksUnlock the doors from outside thevehicle by using the key in the door,or by pressing the UNLOCK buttonon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

From inside, use the manual locklever, or the power door lock switch.

In Brief 1-5

Power Door Locks

Press L (Lock) to lock the doors.

Press U (Unlock) to unlock thedoors.

For more information, see:. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation on page 2‑3.. Door Locks on page 2‑4.. Power Door Locks on

page 2‑5 .

Tailgate

Tailgate (H3T)

Open the tailgate by pulling up onthe outside handle while pulling thetailgate down.

Removing the Tailgate

To remove the tailgate:

1. Open the tailgate fully andremove the retainer clip from thedriver's side hinge.

1-6 In Brief

2. Lift up slightly on the entiretailgate assembly.

Remove the retaining cablesfrom both sides of the pickupbox by pulling the clips awayfrom the bolt heads whilepushing the cable bracketforward. When the larger partof the hole on the bracket isover the bolt, slide the bracketoff of the bolt.

3. With the tailgate partially down,lift up on the passenger's sideand pull the tailgate toward you,then move the tailgate to theright to release the driver's side.

Swing-gate (H3)

To lock or unlock the swing‐gate,use the power door lock switch orthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

To open the swing‐gate, use thedoor handle to pull the swing-gaterearward slightly so it opensautomatically.

See Tailgate on page 2‑7.

Windows

On vehicles with power windows,the switches are on the driver doorarmrest. The passenger door hasa switch that controls only thatwindow.

Press the front of the switch to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.

For more information, see PowerWindows on page 2‑16.

In Brief 1-7

Seat Adjustment

1. Lift the handle under the seat tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat to be sureit is locked in place.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Move the seat forward or rearwardby moving the control forward orrearward

Raise or lower the seat by movingthe control up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3 .

To recline the seatback lift the leverand move the seatback. To raisethe seatback lift the lever withoutapplying pressure to the seatback.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑4 .

1-8 In Brief

Press the front or rear of the powerlumbar control to increase ordecrease lumbar support.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑4 .

Heated Seats

Heated Front Seats

The heated seat controls arelocated on the center console.The engine must be running tooperate them.

I : Press to turn on the heatedseatback.

J : Press to turn on or off theheated seat and seatback.

For more information see HeatedFront Seats on page 3‑6.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

For more information, see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

Safety Belt

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑10.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑15.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑20.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑51.

In Brief 1-9

Sensing System forPassenger Airbag

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag androof‐rail airbags (if equipped) are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑11 formore information.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicleis started.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

H3 shown, H3T similar

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

To adjust the power mirrors:

1. Press the left or right side of theselector switch to choose thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the round, four-waycontrol pad to adjust the mirror.

Interior Mirror

The vehicle has an automaticdimming rearview mirror with acompass and temperature display.Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time theignition is turned to start.

z : Press to turn the dimmingfeature and/or compass display onor off.

For more information, see. Automatic Dimming Rearview

Mirror on page 2‑14.. Driver Information Center (DIC)

on page 5‑18.

1-10 In Brief

Steering WheelAdjustment

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever towards you.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown into a comfortable position.

3. Release the lever to lock thesteering wheel in place.

See Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2 .

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps are located in thefront area of the vehicle. There isalso a dome lamp in the cargo areaof the H3 model only.

Turn the thumbwheel, located nextto the exterior lamps control, all theway up to turn the dome andfootwell lamps on.

The dome lamp in the cargo areaautomatically turns off when:. The shift lever is shifted out of

P (Park) (automatictransmissions).

. The parking brake is released(manual transmissions).

Dome Lamp Override

E (Dome Lamp Override): Thedome lamp override button islocated below the exterior lampscontrol.

Reading Lamps

Press the lens on the lamps to turneach reading lamp on or off.

These lamps will not come on withthe dome lamps.

For more information, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6‑7.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑7.. Exit Lighting on page 6‑8.

In Brief 1-11

Exterior Lighting

9 : Turns off all exterior lampsincluding the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

AUTO: Automatic operation ofthe headlamps and other exteriorlamps.

;: Manual operation of the parkinglamps and other exterior lamps,except headlamps.

2: Manual operation of theheadlamps and other exteriorlamps.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1 .. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑3 .. Fog Lamps on page 6‑6.. Automatic Headlamp System on

page 6‑4 .. Off-Road Lamps on page 6‑6.

Washer and WiperSystems

8: Use for a single wiping cycle.

6 : Delays wiping cycle. Move theband to adjust the frequency ofwipes.

6 : Slow wipes.

1 : Fast wipes.

9: Turns the wipers off.

Windshield Washer: Push thepaddle on top of the turn signal/lanechange lever to spray washer fluidon the windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑2 and Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 5‑3.

1-12 In Brief

Climate Controls

A. Temperature Control

B. Fan Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. Air Recirculation

F. Rear Window Defogger

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 .

TransmissionFull-Time Four-Wheel Drive sendsengine power to all four wheels forextra traction.

Transfer Case Buttons

The transfer case buttons arelocated to the right of the instrumentpanel cluster. Use these switches toshift into and out of the differentFull-Time Four-Wheel Drive modes.

4 m (Four-Wheel High): For drivingin most street and highwaysituations.

N (Neutral): Shift the transfer caseto Neutral only when towing thevehicle. See Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑70.

In Brief 1-13

4 m Q (Four-Wheel-High Lock):When extra traction is needed inmost off-road situations.

4 n Q (Four-Wheel-Low Lock):Delivers extra torque to allfour wheels. Used for extremeoff-road conditions. See Four-WheelDrive on page 9‑46.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Six-Disc CD Radio

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑2.

Control Buttons

P (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn to increase or to decrease thevolume.

1-14 In Brief

BAND: Press to select FM1, FM2,AM, XM1, if equipped, or XM2,if equipped.

DISP: Turn to select a radio station.

1-6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Pressto select preset stations.

t SEEKu : Press and release togo to the previous or next stationand stay there. Press and hold toscan stations or preset stations.

Setting the Clock

The clock can be set with theignition on or off.

To set the clock:

1. Press and hold H until thecorrect hour and AM or PMdisplays.

2. Press and hold M until thecorrect minute displays.

Press DISP (Display) to display thetime while the ignition is turned off.

Setting Preset Stations

Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,and six AM, six XM1, if equipped,and six XM2, if equipped) can beprogrammed.

To program presets:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of thesix numbered pushbuttonsuntil the radio beeps once.

5. Repeat the steps for eachpushbutton.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio servicethat is based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radiohas a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A fee is required to receivethe XM service.

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

See Satellite Radio on page 7‑6.

In Brief 1-15

Bluetooth®

The in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem allows users with aBluetooth-enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio system,microphone and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth on page 7‑15.

Navigation SystemThe vehicle's navigation systemprovides detailed maps of mostmajor freeways and roadsthroughout the United States andCanada. After a destination hasbeen set, the system providesturn-by-turn instructions for reachingthe destination. In addition, thesystem can help locate a variety of

points of interest (POI), such asbanks, airports, restaurants,and more.

See the vehicle's Navigation Systemmanual for more information.

Cruise Control

The cruise controls are located atthe end of the multifunction lever.

9: Turns the system off.

R: Turns the system on.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use toaccelerate or resume speed.

rT(Set): Press the button at theend of the lever to set the speed.

For more information, see CruiseControl on page 9‑57.

Storage CompartmentsThe vehicle comes with a cargomanagement system located in therear of the vehicle. The system hasthree rails located on the front andsides of the bed.

There are four adjustable cargotie-downs, that can be placed on theupper and lower slides of the rail.

The cargo management system canbe removed and re-installed into thevehicle.

For more information, see CargoManagement System on page 4‑2.

1-16 In Brief

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to connect auxiliary electricalequipment, such as a cellularphone.

There are two accessory poweroutlets located under the climatecontrol system. There is alsoone accessory power outletlocated in the rear cargo area(H3 model only).

To use the outlet, open the cover.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑5and Cigarette Lighter on page 5‑5.

Sunroof

Sunroof

To open or close the sunroof, pressthe front or rear of the switch.

For more information see Sunroofon page 2‑17.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control,

press and release the d buttonlocated on the Instrumentpanel. d illuminates and theappropriate DIC messageis displayed. See VehicleMessages on page 5‑21.

. Press the button again to turntraction control back on.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑52.

In Brief 1-17

StabiliTrak®

Electronic stability control systemassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.The system turns on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.. To turn off both traction

control and electronicstability control, press andhold d until d illuminatesand the appropriate DICmessage is displayed.See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑21.

. Press the button again toturn on both systems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak System on page 9‑53.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The Tire Pressure Monitor Systemalerts you when a significantreduction in pressure occurs inone or more of your vehicle’s tiresby illuminating the low tire pressurewarning light on the instrumentcluster. If the warning light comeson, stop as soon as possible andinflate the tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label located on thedriver side center pillar (B pillar).See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑27. The warning light willremain on until the tire pressure iscorrected.

You may notice during coolerconditions that the low tire pressurewarning light will appear when thevehicle is first started and thenturn off as you drive. This may bean early indicator that your tirepressures are getting low and thetires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The Tire Pressure Monitor Systemcan alert you about low tirepressure, but it does not replacenormal monthly tire maintenance.It is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑52 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑53.

1-18 In Brief

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press and release the stemin the lower center of theinstrument cluster until the“Oil Life” message is displayed.

3. Once the alternating “Oil Life”and “Reset” messages appear,press and hold the stemuntil several beeps sound.This confirms that the oil lifesystem has been reset.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have the5.3L V8 engine (Code P) havea yellow fuel cap and can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑66. In all other engines,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑64.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control, if equipped.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

In Brief 1-19

Roadside ServiceU.S.: 1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376)

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new HUMMER,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Service program. Thisprogram provides technically trainedadvisors who are available 24 hoursa day, 365 days a year, minor repairinformation or towing arrangements.

Roadside Service and OnStar

If you have a current OnStarsubscription, press the OnStarbutton and the current GPS locationwill be sent to an OnStar Advisorwho will assess your problem,contact Roadside Assistance, andrelay exact location to get you thehelp you need.

Online Owner Center

The Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privilegesand more.

Sign up today at:www.gmownercenter.com/hummer (U.S.).

OnStar®

OnStar® uses several innovativetechnologies and live advisors toprovide a wide range of safety,security, navigation, diagnostics,and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStaradvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to seeif you need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : This blue button connects youto a specially trained OnStar advisorto verify your account informationand to answer questions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar emergencyadvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for turn‐by‐turnnavigation.

1-20 In Brief

Crisis Assist, Stolen VehicleAssistance, Vehicle Diagnostics,Remote Door Unlock, RoadsideAssistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation and Hands‐FreeCalling are available on mostvehicles. Not all OnStar servicesare available on all vehicles.For more information see theOnStar Owner's Guide or visitwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) orTTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, orpressQ to speak with anOnStar advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations,see the OnStar Owner's Guide inthe glove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar terms and conditionsincluded in the OnStar SubscriberInformation.

OnStar service cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area. OnStar service alsocannot work unless the vehicle isin a place where the wirelessservice provider OnStar has hiredfor that area has coverage, networkcapacity and reception when theservice is needed, and technologythat is compatible with the OnStarservice. Not all services areavailable everywhere, particularlyin remote or enclosed areas, or atall times.

The OnStar system can record andtransmit vehicle information. Thisinformation is automatically sent toan OnStar call center whenQ is

pressed,] is pressed, or if theairbags or ACR system deploy.This information usually includesthe vehicle's GPS location and, inthe event of a crash, additionalinformation regarding the crash thatthe vehicle was involved in (e.g. thedirection from which the vehicle washit). When the virtual advisor featureof OnStar hands-free calling isused, the vehicle also sends OnStarthe vehicle's GPS location so theycan provide services where it islocated.

Location information about thevehicle is only available if the GPSsatellite signals are unobstructedand available.

In Brief 1-21

The vehicle must have a workingelectrical system, includingadequate battery power, for theOnStar equipment to operate. Thereare other problems OnStar cannotcontrol that may prevent OnStarfrom providing OnStar service atany particular time or place. Someexamples are damage to importantparts of the vehicle in a crash, hills,tall buildings, tunnels, weather orwireless phone network congestion.

Additional OnStar Controls

The vehicle may have a button,located on the driver side of theinstrument panel near the headlampcontrols, that can be used to interactwith OnStar.

Use this button to dial numbers intovoicemail systems or to dial phonenumber extensions. See the OnStarOwner's Guide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system maynot be functioning properly.PressQ and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear(no light is appearing), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.PressQ to confirm that the OnStarequipment is active.

1-22 In Brief

2 NOTES

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-6Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

DoorsTailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-9Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10ImmobilizerOperation (U.S.) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Immobilizer Operation(Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Interior MirrorsAutomatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key is used for the ignition anddriver's door lock.

The vehicle has two identical keysand a key code number.

Give the key code to your dealeror qualified locksmith if a new keyneeds to be made.

Notice: If you ever lock your keysin the vehicle, you may have todamage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Serviceon page 13‑5.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of IndustryCanada.

Changes or modifications tothis system by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance.

The transmitter may betoo far from the vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to 9 m(30 feet) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.

LOCK: Press to lock all the doors.The parking lamps may flash andthe horn may chirp.

If a door is open or ajar when LOCKis pressed, the doors lock, but thetheft-deterrent system does not armuntil the open door is closed.

Pressing LOCK may arm thecontent theft-deterrent system.See Anti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑9 for additional information.

UNLOCK: Press to unlock only thedriver's door. The interior lampscome on, the parking lamps mayflash, and the horn may sound.

Press UNLOCK again withinthree seconds to unlock all thedoors.

Pressing UNLOCK may disarm thecontent theft-deterrent system.See Anti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑9 for additional information.

Different feedback choices can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See“Remote Keyless Entry Feedback”under Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5‑18.

L (Panic): Press to activate thealarm. The horn sounds and theheadlamps and taillamps flash forup to 30 seconds. To turn the alarmoff press L again, start the vehicleor wait 30 seconds.


Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmittersprogrammed to this vehicle willwork. If a transmitter is lost orstolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmed throughyour dealer. When the replacementtransmitter is programmed to thisvehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be reprogrammed.Any lost or stolen transmitterswill no longer work once the newtransmitter is programmed. Eachvehicle can have up to fourtransmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

The battery in the transmitter isweak and should be changed if itdoes not work at the normal rangein any location.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into thenotch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery. Replacewith a CR2032 or equivalentbattery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle ina crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From the outside, use the key in thedriver's door or use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

From the inside, use the manuallock levers or power door lockswitch.

Power Door Locks

Driver side shown

The power door lock switches arelocated on the driver and the frontpassenger doors.

Press L (Lock) to lock all the doorsat once. To unlock all the doors,press U (Unlock).


Automatic Door LocksWith an automatic transmission,the vehicle is pre-programmed toautomatically lock the doors whenshifted out of P (Park). All doorsunlock when the vehicle is shiftedback into P (Park).

With a manual transmission, thevehicle is pre-programmed toautomatically lock the doors whenthe vehicle speed reached 15 mph(24 km/h). Removing the key fromthe ignition unlocks the doors.

To program the automatic doorlocks, see “Automatic Door Locks”under Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5‑18.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects against lockingthe key in the vehicle when it is inthe ignition.

A chime sounds as an alert toindicate that the key has been left inthe ignition. When the power doorlock switch is pressed, a door isopen, and the key is in the ignitionall of the doors lock and then thedriver's door unlocks.

Safety LocksEach rear door can be locked so itcannot be opened from the inside.

The rear door security lock islocated on the inside edge of eachrear door.

To engage a security lock:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. Use the ignition key to turn thelock toward the front of thevehicle.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat these steps on the otherrear door.

To open a rear door when thesecurity lock is set, unlock the doorand open the door from the outside.

To disengage a security lock:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. Use the ignition key to turn thelock to the vertical position.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat these steps on the otherrear door.


Doors

Tailgate

Tailgate (H3T)

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to rideon the tailgate, even when thevehicle is operated at low speeds.People riding on the tailgatecan easily lose their balanceand fall in response to vehiclemaneuvers. Falling from a movingvehicle may result in seriousinjuries or death. Do not allowpeople to ride on the tailgate.Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a safetybelt properly.

Open the tailgate by pulling up onthe outside handle while pulling thetailgate down.

When putting the tailgate up, besure it latches securely.

Removing the Tailgate

To remove the tailgate:

1. Open the tailgate fully andremove the retainer clip from thedriver's side hinge.

It is recommended that theretainer clip be stored in a safeplace, like the glove box.


2. Lift up slightly on the entiretailgate assembly.

Remove the retaining cablesfrom both sides of the pickupbox by pulling the clips awayfrom the bolt heads whilepushing the cable bracketforward. When the larger part ofthe hole on the bracket is overthe bolt, slide the bracket off ofthe bolt.

3. With the tailgate partially down,lift up on the passenger's sideand pull the tailgate toward you,then move the tailgate to theright to release the driver's side.

Reverse the procedure to reinstallthe tailgate. Make sure it is secure.

To partially lower the tailgate:

1. With the tailgate fully open, liftup slightly on the entire tailgateassembly.

Tailgate Partially Down

2. Remove the retaining cable fromthe passenger side of the pickupbox by pulling the clip away fromthe bolt head while pushing thecable bracket forward.

When the larger part of the holeon the bracket is over the bolt,slide the bracket off of the bolt.

3. Slide the lower end fitting ontothe front bolt. The tailgate willnow stay in the partially openedposition.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for thedriver side.

When closing the tailgate thebracket cannot be in the partiallyopened position. It must beanchored on the rear bolt usingthe top position on the bracket.

Swing-gate (H3)

To lock or unlock the swing‐gate,use the power door lock switch orthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

{ WARNING

Make sure the swing‐gate iscompletely closed. Driving withthe swing‐gate open could injurepedestrians or damage thevehicle.


To open the swing‐gate, use thedoor handle to pull the swing-gaterearward slightly so it opensautomatically.

Vehicle SecurityVehicle theft is big business,especially in some cities. Thisvehicle has theft-deterrent features,however, they do not make itimpossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle has a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

The security light is located on theinstrument panel cluster.

To arm the system:

1. Close all the doors.

2. Lock the doors with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.The security light flashes.

If the lock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, but a door isopen, the doors lock, the lights mayflash and the horn may sound.Close the open door to arm thesystem.

The alarm goes off if a locked dooris not opened using the RKEtransmitter, or by OnStar®.A pre-alarm sounds the horn atreduced intensity for 10 seconds.Then, the front turn signal lampsflash for two minutes, and the hornsounds for two minutes. The alarmthen turns off to save battery power.

Start the engine to turn off thealarm.

The theft-deterrent system doesnot activate if the doors are lockedwith the key, the manual door lock,or power door lock switch. Thesystem can only be activated usingthe RKE transmitter, or by OnStar.See the OnStar Owner's Guide foradditional information. The vehiclecan be started with the correct key ifthe alarm has been set off.


To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the manual

door lock lever, the power doorlock switch, or the key, after thedoors are closed.

. Unlock the doors by pressingthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter or by contactingOnStar. Unlocking a door anyother way activates the alarm.

Press unlock on the RKEtransmitter, start the vehicle withthe correct key, or have OnStarunlock the doors to turn the alarmoff. The alarm does not stop if adoor is unlocked any other way.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lock thedoors with the RKE transmitter.

2. Unlock the door with the manualdoor lock and open the door.The pre-alarm should soundfollowed by the full alarm about10 seconds later.

3. Press the unlock button on theRKE transmitter or start theengine to turn the alarm off.

If the alarm does not sound but thelights flash, check to see if the hornworks. The horn fuse could beblown. To replace the fuse, seeFuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑39.

If the alarm does not sound or thefront turn signal lamps do not flash,see your dealer for service.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of IndustryCanada.

ImmobilizerOperation (U.S.)Passlock® is a passivetheft-deterrent system that enablesfuel if the vehicle is started with avalid key. If an incorrect key is usedor the ignition lock cylinder istampered with, the fuel system isdisabled and the vehicle does notstart.

The security light turns offapproximately five seconds afterthe engine is started. See SecurityLight on page 5‑17.


If the engine stalls and the securitylight flashes, wait about 10 minutesuntil the light stops flashing beforetrying to restart the engine. Releasethe key from START as soon as theengine starts.

If the engine does not start afterthree tries, the vehicle needsservice.

If the engine is running and thesecurity light comes on, the enginerestarts if you turn the engine off.However, the Passlock system isnot working properly and must beserviced by your dealer. The vehicleis not protected by Passlock at thistime. See your dealer for service.

In an emergency, call the RoadsideAssistance Center. See RoadsideService on page 13‑5.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Immobilizer Operation(Canada)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turnedto ON/RUN.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

The key uses a transponder thatmatches an immobilizer control unitin the vehicle. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. If the key is everdamaged, the vehicle may not start.

When trying to start the vehicle,if the engine does not start and thesecurity light comes on, there maybe a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition off and tryagain.


If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. Check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑39. If theengine still does not start with theother key, the vehicle needs service.If the vehicle does start, the first keymay be faulty. See your dealer whocan service the theft-deterrentsystem and have a new key made.

It is possible for the theft-deterrentsystem decoder to learn thetransponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keyscan be programmed for the vehicle.The following procedure is forprogramming additional keys only.

If the keys are lost or damaged,only a dealer can service thetheft-deterrent system to have newones made. Two current driver'skeys are required to programadditional keys.

To program a new key:

1. Verify that the new key hasPK3+ stamped on it.

2. Insert the current driver's key inthe ignition and start the engine.If the engine does not start seeyour dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the second current driver'skey in the ignition and start theengine within ten seconds ofremoving the previous key. If theengine does not start see yourdealer for service.

5. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key. Insert the key tobe programmed and turn it toON/RUN within ten seconds ofremoving the previous key.

The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 5 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If the security light comes onand stays on while driving, theengine will restart if you turn it off.However, the theft-deterrentsystem is not working properly andmust be serviced by your dealer.The vehicle is not protected by thetheft-deterrent system at this time.

In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Serviceon page 13‑5.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.


Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

H3 shown, H3T similar

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

To adjust the power mirrors:

1. Press the left or right side of theselector switch to choose thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the round, four-waycontrol pad to adjust the mirror.

Folding Mirrors

Manual

Manually fold the mirrors inwardto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.To fold, pull the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn it to the original position.


Interior Mirrors

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle has an automaticdimming rearview mirror with acompass and temperature display.

Vehicles with OnStar® havethree additional control buttonsfor the OnStar® system. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar® and how to subscribe to it.See the OnStar® owner guide formore information about the servicesOnStar® provides.

z (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

The vehicle may also have a RearVision Camera (RVC). See RearVision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑60for more information.

Automatic Dimming MirrorOperation

Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time theignition is turned to start.

Temperature Display

To adjust between Fahrenheit andCelsius:

. Pressz for approximatelyfour seconds to toggle thedisplay from F (Fahrenheit)to C (Celsius) to OFF. Releasethe button after the display hastoggled to the next state.

The temperature display willremain in its current state eachtime the ignition goes through itscycle.

. At start up, if the vehicle hasbeen off for less than two anda half hours, and the last storedtemperature was less thanthe current temperature, thesensor will increase 1°F everytwo minutes until the correcttemperature is displayed.

. If the vehicle has been off morethan two and a half hours, orthe last stored temperatureis greater than the currenttemperature, the currenttemperature immediatelydisplays.

. If the temperature is 37°F (3°C)or lower, ICE will flash on thetemperature display. This displaywill flash every two seconds for aperiod of oneminute.

If an abnormal temperature readingis displayed for an extended periodof time, see your dealer. Undercertain circumstances, a delay inupdating the temperature is normal.


Compass Display

Pressz to turn the compassdisplay on or off.

For more information about thecompass, see Compass onpage 5‑3 .

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.


Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move.The windows will function andthey could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavekeys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

The power window controls arelocated on each door.

The driver's door also haspassenger window switches.The ignition must be inACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,or in Retained Accessory Power(RAP). See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑35.

Pull up or press down on the frontedge of the switch to raise or lowerthe window.

Express‐Down Window

The driver's window has anexpress‐down feature that lowersthe window without holding theswitch. Press the front edge of theswitch past the first position toactivate the express‐down mode.To stop the express‐down, pull upon the switch. To open the windowpartway, press the front of theswitch to the first position until thewindow is at the desired level.


Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The windowlockout button is located in frontof the window switches. This featuredisables the passenger's windowswitches when the button ispressed. Press the button again toturn the lockout off. A red band onthe side of the button is lit when thewindows are not locked out.

Sun VisorsPull the visor toward you, or move itto the side to help reduce glare.Pull out the extenders for furthercoverage.

On a visor with a mirror, lift thecover to use it.

Roof

SunroofTo operate a power sliding sunroof,the ignition must be on, or RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) must beactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑35.

The switch used to operate thesunroof is located in the headliner.

Express Open/Close: To open orclose the sunroof, fully press andrelease the rear or front of theswitch. The sunroof automaticallyopens. To stop the sunroof partway,press the switch a second time.An air deflector raises when thesunroof is fully opened.

Vent: With the sunroof closed,press and hold the front of theswitch to vent the sunroof. To stopthe sunroof before it reaches its fullvent position, release the switch.Press and hold the back of theswitch to close.

Do not leave the sunroof open forlong periods of time. Excessivedebris may collect in the tracksand possibly damage the sunroofoperation, or plug the water drainingsystem.


Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the tracks thatcould cause an issue with sunroofoperation, noise or plug the waterdrainage system. Periodically openthe sunroof and remove anyobstacles or loose debris. Wipe thesunroof seal and roof sealing areausing a clean cloth, mild soap, andwater. Do not remove grease fromsunroof.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof when it is closing, theanti-pinch feature detects the objectand stops the sunroof from closingat the point of the obstruction. Thesunroof then returns to the full-openposition.

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade automatically openswith the sunroof. Manually pull itshut after the sunroof is closed.

To adjust the sunshade, push itbackward or pull it forward to thedesired position. The sunshadecannot be adjusted further thanthe current closed position of thesunroof.

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Rear SeatsRear Seats (H3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Rear Seats (H3T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-26Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-29When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-40

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-41Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-47Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-49Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Outboard SeatingPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Center SeatingPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that arenot installed and adjustedproperly, there is a greaterchance that occupants willsuffer a neck/spinal injury in acrash. Do not drive until the headrestraints for all occupants areinstalled and adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint up to raiseit. To lower the head restraint,press the button, located on thetop of the seatback, and push therestraint down.

Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

The head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.


Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver's seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver's seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To move a manual seat forward orrearward:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

Try to move the seat with yourbody to be sure the seat is lockedin place.

Power Seat Adjustment

On a vehicle with power seats, thecontrols used to operate them arelocated on the outboard side of theseats.

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.


. Raise or lower the entire seatcushion by moving the controlup or down.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

On vehicles with this feature, theknob is located on the outboard sideof the seat.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the lumbar support.

Power Lumbar

On vehicles with this feature, thecontrol is located on the outboardside of the seat(s).

To increase or decrease lumbarsupport, press and hold the front orrear of the control.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver's seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver's seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.


The seats have manual recliningseatbacks. The lever used tooperate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the recline lever and movethe seatback to the desiredposition, then release the leverto lock the seatback in place.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

Do not have a seatback reclinedwhen the vehicle is moving.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.


Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures.To reduce the risk of burns,people with such a conditionshould use care when usingthe seat heater, especially forlong periods of time. Do notplace anything on the seat thatinsulates against heat, such asa blanket, cushion, cover orsimilar item. This may causethe seat heater to overheat.An overheated seat heater maycause a burn or may damagethe seat.

This feature heats the cushion andseatbacks.

On vehicles with this feature thecontrols are located on the outboardsides of the front seats.

Press the top of the switch toturn the heat to the high setting.Press the bottom of the switch toturn the heat to the low setting.Put the switch in the center positionto turn the heat off.

The ignition must be on for theheated seat feature to work. Theseat will heat to the last setting if theignition has been turned off andthen turned back on.

For the heated seat feature to workon the passenger seat the safetybelt must be fastened.


Rear Seats

Rear Seats (H3)The 60/40 split bench seats can befolded for more cargo space.

Folding the Seatbacks

There should be nothing on, under,or in front of the seat, and the frontseats should be moved forward.

To fold the rear seatback(s):

1. Reach under the front of theseat and lift the cushion up whilemoving it forward.

2. Pull the seat cushion forwarduntil it rests in the footwell.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

3. Lift the latch on top of theseatback and pull the seatbackforward. Fold the seatback downuntil it is nearly flat.

4. If the seatback will not foldnearly flat, try moving the frontseat forward and/or moving thefront seatback more upright.

5. Repeat the steps for theother half of the 60/40 splitbench seat.


Returning the Seatbacks to anUpright Position

{ WARNING


{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

To return the seatback(s) to theupright position:

1. Lift the seatback up and push itall the way rearward.

2. Reach under the front seat andlift the cushion while moving itrearward until it latches.

3. Pull forward on the seatbackand push down on the seatcushion to make sure the seatis securely in place.


Rear Seats (H3T)Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the rear seatback(s) forward:

1. Disconnect the rear centersafety belt latch from the minibuckle by inserting the tip of thesafety belt into the slot on thebuckle. Let the belt retract.

2. Pull the loop, located on theoutboard side of the seatback,forward until you hear a click.

3. Fold the seatback forwardslightly so that the headrest canbe removed.

4. Remove the headrest bypressing the button on theheadrest post, at the top of theseatback.

5. Lift the headrest off the seatbackand store on the back panel.


To return the seatback(s) to theupright position:

1. Lift the seatback partially andreinsert the headrest.

2. Lift the seatback completely andpush it into place.

{ WARNING


3. Make sure the seatback islocked by pushing and pullingon it.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

4. Reconnect the center safety beltlatch plate to the mini buckle.Make sure the safety belt is nottwisted.

5. Push and pull on the latch plateto be sure it is secure.

When the seatback is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder orbe ejected from the vehicle.You and your passenger(s) canbe seriously injured or killed.In the same crash, you mightnot be, if you are buckled up.Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passenger(s)are restrained properly too.


{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

{ WARNING

People riding on the tailgate(if equipped) can easily lose theirbalance and fall even when thevehicle is operated at low speeds.Falling from a moving vehicle mayresult in serious injuries or death.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑9 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!


Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.


The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow downas the vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.


Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, soyou can unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safetybelt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25miles) of home.And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deathsoccur at speeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.


How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there aredifferent rules for smaller childrenand infants. If a child will be riding inthe vehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑42 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑44. Followthose rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.

First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should be

worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If youslid under it, the belt would applyforce on your abdomen. This couldcause serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.


Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.


{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.The lap belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.


A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.



A: The belt is over an armrest.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.


{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.


A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seatingposition with a detachable safetybelt and the safety belt is notattached, see Rear Seats (H3) onpage 3‑7 or Rear Seats (H3T) onpage 3‑9 for instruction onreconnecting the safety belt to themini‐buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.


2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled outall the way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑35 for more information.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑26.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.


4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjustment” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so that theshoulder portion of the belt iscentered on the shoulder. Thebelt should be away from the faceand neck, but not falling off of theshoulder. Improper shoulder beltheight adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in acrash.


To move it down, press the releasebutton (A) and move the heightadjuster to the desired position.You can move the height adjusterup just by pushing up on theshoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the button to makesure it has locked into position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, for vehicleswith side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System PartsAfter a Crash on page 3‑27.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.


Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out frombetween the edge of theseatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from itsstorage clip.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt isnot twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be underthe belt and the guide on top.


{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section.Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Pull theguide upward to expose its storageclip, and then slide the guide ontothe clip. Turn the guide and clipinward and slide them in betweenthe seatback and the interior body,leaving only the loop of the elasticcord exposed.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.


The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, attach it to the regularsafety belt. For more information,see the instruction sheet that comeswith the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors andanchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑9 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care onpage 3‑26.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑10.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A roof-rail airbag for the driver

and the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.


Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑31.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withroof-rail airbags.


{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag systemis designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑42 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑44.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑10 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.


The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger's side.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The roof-rail airbags for thedriver, right front passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.


When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designedto inflate if the impact exceedsa predetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags willor should deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflateat different crash speeds.For example:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an objectthat deforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 3‑27.Roof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover. Roof-rail airbagswill inflate if the crash severity isabove the system's designedthreshold level. The threshold levelcan vary with specific vehicledesign.


Roof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in rear impacts. Both roof-railairbags will deploy when either sideof the vehicle is struck, or if thesensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For roof-rail airbags, deploymentis determined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows that haveoccupant seating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stopping theoccupant more gradually. Roof-railairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.


Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑31 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags inflate, theyquickly deflate, so quickly that somepeople may not even realize anairbag inflated. Roof-rail airbagsmay still be at least partially inflatedfor some time after they deploy.Some components of the airbagmodule may be hot for severalminutes. For location of the airbagmodules, see What Makes anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑32.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing outof the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soonas it is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.


You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lamps and hazard warningflashers by using the controls forthose features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough toinflate the airbags may havealso damaged important functionsin the vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

If damage to the vehicle is minor,you may attempt to restart thevehicle's engine. Note: If the fuelsystem has been shut off after anairbag has inflated, you may notbe able to restart the engine for upto ten minutes. See Starting theEngine on page 9‑35 for moreinformation.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be there

to help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑15 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑15.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.


Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the instrument panel when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, the word

ON or OFF, or the symbol for on oroff, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑11.

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbags andthe roof-rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are partof the right front passenger seatand safety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presenceof a properly-seated occupantand determine if the right frontpassenger frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.


A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.


When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑11.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate)the right front passenger frontalairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size issitting properly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag, depending upon the personseating posture and body build.

Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑10 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.


If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearOutboard Seating Position) onpage 3‑59 or Securing ChildRestraints (Rear Center SeatingPosition) on page 3‑61 orSecuring Child Restraints (RightFront Seat Position) onpage 3‑62.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2 .

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit with achild present in a child restraint,secure the child restraint in arear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,


use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing system maintainthe passenger airbag status.See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

If the shoulder portion of the belt ispulled out all the way, the childrestraint locking feature will beengaged. This may unintentionallycause the passenger sensingsystem to turn the airbag off forsome adult size occupants. If thishappens, just let the belt go back allthe way and start again.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, andseat massagers can affect howwell the passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend thatyou not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by Hummer for yourspecific vehicle. See AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑40 for moreinformation about modifications thatcan affect how the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.


Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There areparts of the airbag system inseveral places around the vehicle.Your dealer and the service manualhave information about servicingthe vehicle and the airbag system.To purchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑12.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, frontend or side sheet metal, theymay keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Changingor moving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,

steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,rollover sensor module, or airbagwiring can affect the operation ofthe airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing systemfor the right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-Hummercovers, upholstery or trim,or with Hummer covers,upholstery or trim designed fora different vehicle. Any object,such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancingpad or device, installed under or


on top of the seat fabric, couldalso interfere with the operationof the passenger sensingsystem. This could eitherprevent proper deployment ofthe passenger airbag(s) orprevent the passenger sensingsystem from properly turningoff the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑35.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance arein Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑60 for additionalimportant information.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance arein Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑10 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑32. See yourdealer for service.


Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure your airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See your dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑10 for more information.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.


The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat, statethe weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seatwith a lap-shoulder belt until thechild passes the below fit test:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑20 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑20.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.


{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, thetwo children can be crushedtogether and seriously injured.A safety belt must be used byonly one person at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.


{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder beltsoffer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly becomea 110 kg (240 lb) force on aperson's arms. An infant shouldbe secured in an appropriaterestraint.


{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle'sowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.


{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash,infants need complete support.This is because an infant's neckis not fully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.


(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improve the fitof the vehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle's safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance ofinjury, the child restraint must besecured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be securedin vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.


See Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑51 for more information.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childis not properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.


A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑35 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.


Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraintwith a top tether, you must alsouse either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCHsystem in the vehicle, you needa child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide youwith instructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments.The following explains how toattach a child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraintwith lower attachments (B).


Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have asingle attachment (B) to securethe top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that havea top tether are designed for usewith or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for the childrestraint.

If the child restraint does not have atop tether, one can be obtained, inkit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Each outboard seating position inthe rear seat has exposed metallower anchors in the creasebetween the seatback and theseat cushion.


For H3T models, the top tetheranchor symbol is located near thetop tether anchors to assist you inlocating the top tether anchors.

H3T

For H3T models, the top tetheranchors are located on the backpanel behind each rear seatingposition. Be sure to use an anchor

located on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

H3

For H3 models, the top tetheranchors are located on the back ofthe rear seatbacks. Be sure to usean anchor located on the sameside of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑49 foradditional information.


Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injuredor killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle'ssafety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraintso children cannot reach them.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock,if your vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.


H3T Models

1. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor (A), if equipped. Refer tothe child restraint instructionsand the following steps:

1.1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.2. Pull the seatback forwardto access the top tetheranchors (A). See RearSeats (H3) on page 3‑7

or Rear Seats (H3T) onpage 3‑9 for additionalinformation.

1.3. Route the top tetheraccording to the childrestraint instructions andthe following instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.


If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

1.4. Attach the top tether to theanchor (A). Make sure thatyou secure the top tether tothe top tether anchor andnot to the seatbacklatch (B).

1.5. Push rearward on theseatback until it locks intoits upright position. Pushand pull on the seatback tomake sure it is securedproperly.

2. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

2.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

2.2. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.


3. Tighten the top tether.

If the headrest interferes with theinstallation of the child restraint,remove the headrest by pressingthe button on the headrest post,at the top of the seatback, andlift to remove. Store the headrestunder the outboard side of therear seat.

4. Push and pull the child restraintin different directions to be sureit is secure.

When removing the childrestraint, reinsert the headrest ifit has been removed from theseatback.

H3 Models

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desired

seating position does nothave lower anchors, securethe child restraint with the toptether and the safety belts.Refer to the child restraintmanufacturer instructions andthe instructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Route, attach and tightenthe top tether accordingto the child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.


If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether around theheadrest or head restraint.



Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Outboard SeatingPosition)When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑51 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑51 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to securethe child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.


If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑49.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

3. For H3T models, tilt the latchplate to adjust the belt if needed.



5. For H3 models, pull the rest ofthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock.


6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

7. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑51 for moreinformation.

For H3T models, if the headrestinterferes with the installation ofthe child restraint, remove theheadrest by pressing the buttonon the headrest post, at thetop of the seatback, and lift toremove. Store the headrestunder the outboard side of therear seat.


To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it. If theheadrest has been removed,reinsert it onto the seatback.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Center SeatingPosition)Many child restraints are too wide tobe correctly secured in the centerrear seat, although some of themwill fit there. If the center seatposition is too narrow for the childrestraint, secure it in a rear outsideseat position.

If a child restraint is secured in thecenter seat position, follow theinstructions in Securing ChildRestraints (Rear Outboard SeatingPosition) on page 3‑59 or SecuringChild Restraints (Rear CenterSeating Position) on page 3‑61 orSecuring Child Restraints (RightFront Seat Position) on page 3‑62.


Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition)The vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑49.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑35and Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑11 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑35 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑51 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑51 fortop tether anchor locations.


Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off theright front passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator onthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑11.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



5. Pull the rest of the shoulder beltall the way out of the retractor toset the lock.


6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.


If the airbag is off, the off indicatorin the passenger airbag statusindicator will come on and stay onwhen the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,see “If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint ” under PassengerSensing System on page 3‑35 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.

Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-1

Additional Storage FeaturesRear Compartment/StoragePanel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by pulling up onthe bottom of the handle.

CupholdersThe vehicle may have cupholders infront of the front armrest storagearea and in the lower area of thedriver and front passenger doors.

The H3 may also have a cupholderin the center of the rear bench seat.Pull down on the cover to open thecupholder.

The H3T may have cupholders inthe rear seat and cup/bottle holderslocated on the bottom of the reardoors.

Front StorageThe vehicle has a storage netlocated on the back of each frontseat. To remove a net, pull out onthe four clips.

Center Console StorageA two tiered storage area is locatedin the center console. To open, liftthe latch on the front and pull up.Pull out the top storage area toaccess storage underneath.

4-2 Storage

Additional StorageFeatures

Rear Compartment/Storage Panel CoverThe H3 has a rear storage arealocated on the passenger side of thecargo area. To open it, pull the twotabs out and open lid.

Cargo CoverNotice: Do not put items onto thecargo cover. The weight of theitems could cause the attachmentclips to break. The cargo covercould no longer be attached andused. The repairs would not becovered by the warranty. Neverput anything on top of the cargocover.

The vehicle may have a cargocover. It can be used to coveritems in the rear of the vehicle.To install the cover, place the loopson each corner of the cover on thefour hooks in the rear of the vehicle.The cover should be stored securelywhen not in use.

Cargo Tie DownsThere may be four cargo tie-downsthat can be moved on the trackslocated on the roof. To move, loosenthe tie-down counterclockwise. Turnclockwise to tighten and lock inplace.

Cargo ManagementSystemThe vehicle comes with a cargomanagement system located in thebed of the vehicle. The systemcontains three rails located on thefront and sides of the bed.

The system has four adjustablecargo tie-downs, that can be placedon the upper and lower slides ofthe rail.

Storage 4-3

To adjust a tie-down, pull the locatorpin out and move the tie-down toanother location making sure thelocator pin lines up with a locatorhole on the rail. The tie-down pinmay not be installed correctly if thepin does not line up, turn it over andreinstall. The tie-down will not movewhen the pin is completely installed.The maximum load for each rail is227 kg (500 lbs).

The rails are notched at each endwhich allows the tie-downs to beremoved and placed on another rail.To remove, pull the locator pin outand slide the tie-down to the end ofthe rail and pull back.

To remove or install cargo tie-downsat the front of the bed, slide thecorner cap towards the center ofthe bed to expose the rail notches.To remove the corner cap, pulleither edge away from the rail.

To remove the system, loosenthe toggle bolts on each rail untilthey can be removed from the bedof the truck. To replace the system,place the toggle bolts and railsinto their original locations andtighten them to a torque settingof 17Y (12.5 ft‐lbs).

Notice: If cargo is tied downusing the horizontal slots on thetop of the pickup box, the boxcould be damaged and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Only use the tie-downloops if the vehicle does not havethe cargo management system.

Convenience NetUse the convenience net, located inthe rear, to store small loads as farforward as possible. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.

4-4 Storage

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— the windcan catch it while the vehicle isbeing driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collision,and damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a HUMMERCertified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items.For roof racks that do not havecrossrails included, HUMMERCertified crossrails can bepurchased as an accessory.See your dealer for additionalinformation.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than113 kg (250 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle. For more information onvehicle capacity and loading, seeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑27.

Storage 4-5

Adjusting the Crossrails

To adjust the crossrails to fit a load:

1. Turn the crossrail keycounterclockwise to unlockthe crossrail end cap.

2. Remove the end cap.

3. Pull the lever labeled “PULL”from left to right to loosen thecrossrail.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to theopposite end of the crossrail.

5. Once both sides of the crossrailare loose, adjust the crossrail tothe desired position.

6. Push the lever labeled “PULL”from right to left to lock thecrossrail in place.

7. Reinstall the end cap and turnthe crossrail key to lock thecrossrail.

8. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 to theopposite end of the crossrail.

Stop Tabs

If the vehicle has a sunroof, it hasa crossrail stop tab in the siderail.This tab prevents the crossrail frombeing moved past the opening ofthe sunroof and cargo from beingloaded too far forward.

The vehicle may have cargo tiedowns. Once the cargo is loadedonto the crossrails, use the cargotie downs to secure it . Do not loadcargo directly on the roof of thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑27 for more information.

4-6 Storage

2 NOTES

Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-2Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-9Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-10Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Charging System Light . . . . . . . 5-11MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-16

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-17Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-17Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-22Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-22Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-23Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-23Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-24Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-25Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-25

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-26Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustmentA tilt wheel allows the steeringwheel to be adjusted.

The tilt lever is on the left side of thesteering column.

To tilt, hold the steering wheel andpull the tilt lever toward you. Raiseor lower the wheel to a comfortablelevel, then release the tilt lever tolock the wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

HornPress near the horn symbols orpress on the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

Turn the band with theN symbol tocontrol the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Turn toz for a singlewipe, then release. For severalwipes, hold the band onz longer.

N (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

6 : Slow wipes, turn the band tothe first solid position past the delaysettings.

1 : Fast wipes, turn the band tothe second solid position past thedelay settings.

9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. If they become worn ordamaged, install new blades orblade inserts. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑32

Windshield wipers work in all powermodes, except when the ignition isset to LOCK/OFF. After the engineis turned off, wipers will work inRetained Accessory Power (RAP)mode until a door is opened. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑35.


Windshield Washer

L (Washer Fluid): To spraywasher fluid on the windshield, pushthe paddle marked withL at thetop of the turn signal/lane changelever. The wipers will clear thewindow and then either stop orreturn to the preset speed.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not useyour washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Rear WindowWiper/Washer

For vehicles with this feature, theknob is located on the instrumentpanel below the climate controls.

Z (Rear Wiper): Turn to 1 for aslower wiping speed or to 2 for afaster wiping speed.

0 (Off): Turn to 0 for off.

= (Washer Fluid): Press to washand wipe the window.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid bottle as the windshieldwasher. Check the fluid level if thewindshield can be washed, but therear windows cannot.

Compass

Compass Display

The inside rearview mirror may havea compass display. Pressz to turnthe compass display on or off.


Compass Calibration

The compass may need to becalibrated if CAL is not displayedand the compass requirescalibration. Press and holdO untilCAL displays in the compasswindow, then release the button.The compass is now incalibration mode.. Drive the vehicle in circles

at less than 8 km/h (5 mph)until CAL is no longer displayedin the compass window. Thencontinue to drive to make sureall eight directions are available.

. Drive the vehicle under normaloperating conditions.

Compass Variance

The mirror is set to zone eight.If you do not live in zone eight ordrive out of the area, the compassvariance needs to be changed tothe appropriate zone.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location andvariance zone number on thefollowing zone map.

2. Press and hold O forsix seconds until ZONEdisplays. Release the button.The compass is now inzone mode.

3. Keep pressingO until thedesired zone number displays.Release the button. Afterfour seconds, the new zonenumber locks in and thecompass display returns.

ClockThe clock can be set with theignition on or off. Use the H andM buttons located on the lower leftside of the radio.

To set the clock:

1. Press and hold H until thecorrect hour and AM or PMdisplays.

2. Press and hold M until thecorrect minute displays.

Press DISP (Display) to display thetime while the ignition is turned off.


Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to connect auxiliary electricalequipment, such as a cellularphone.

There are two accessory poweroutlets located under the climatecontrol system. There is also oneaccessory power outlet located inthe rear cargo area (H3 model only).Pull down the small cover to accessthe accessory power outlet.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment on for extendedperiods will drain the battery.Always unplug electricalequipment when not in useand do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximumamperage rating of 20 amperes.

Certain electrical accessoriesmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldresult in blown vehicle or adapterfuses. If you experience a problem,see your dealer for additionalinformation on accessory poweroutlets.

Notice: Adding any electricalequipment to the vehiclecan damage it or keep othercomponents from working asthey should. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperagerating of 20 amperes. Checkwith your dealer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of thepower outlet can cause damagenot covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not hang any typeof accessory or accessorybracket from the plug becausethe power outlets are designedfor accessory power plugs only.

Cigarette LighterFor vehicles with a lighter, push thelighter down and it will pop up whenit is ready to be used.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.


AshtraysFor vehicles with a removableashtray, it can be placed into thecupholder and be removed forcleaning.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.


Instrument Cluster

United States 3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission version shown, 5.3L V8, Canada and Manual Transmissionsimilar


SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in both kilometersper hour (km/h) and miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the newone is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible,it is set at zero and a label is puton the driver's door to show the oldmileage reading.

Trip OdometerThe vehicle has a trip odometer thatindicates how far the vehicle hasbeen driven since the trip odometerwas last set to zero.

See “Trip Odometer” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑18 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

United States Canada

The fuel gauge indicates about howmuch fuel there is remaining in thefuel tank. The ignition must be inON/RUN.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on.

Here are three things that canhappen but do not indicate aproblem with the fuel gauge:. At the gas station, the gas pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or lessfuel to fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whenturning a corner or speeding up.

When the fuel in the fuel tank is low,a LOW FUEL message displays onthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑24 for more information.


Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge


This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the gauge pointer is in the shadedarea of the gauge, the engine istoo hot. It means that the enginecoolant has overheated. If thevehicle has been operating undernormal driving conditions, pull offthe road, stop your vehicle and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑22 for more information.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the engine is started thislight and a chime come on and stayon for several seconds to reminddrivers to fasten their safety belts.The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor chimecome on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

The passenger safety belt reminderlight is by the passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to remind thepassenger to fasten their safety belt.The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the passengerremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.


The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag'selectrical system for malfunctions.The light indicates if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor,the pretensioners, the airbag

modules, the wiring and the crashsensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System onpage 3‑27.

This light comes on when thevehicle is started, and flashes for afew seconds. The light goes outwhen the system is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson while driving, the airbag systemmay not work properly. Have thevehicle serviced right away.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness lightstays on after the vehicle isstarted or comes on while driving,it means the airbag systemmight not be working properly.The airbags in the vehicle mightnot inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash.To help avoid injury, have thevehicle serviced right away.

The airbag readiness light shouldflash for a few seconds when theengine is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.


Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑35 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several seconds

as a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may bea problem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness lightever comes on and stays on, itmeans that something may bewrong with the airbag system.To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have the vehicle servicedright away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑10 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned, but the engineis not running, as a check to show itis working.


It should go out once the enginestarts. If it stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the charging system.A charging system message in theDriver Information Center (DIC)may also appear. See BatteryVoltage and Charging Messages onpage 5‑21 for more information.This light could indicate that thereare problems with a generator drivebelt, or that there is an electricalproblem. Have it checked rightaway. If the vehicle must be driven ashort distance with the light on, turnoff all the accessories, such as theradio and air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures that

emissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light comes on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the check engine light comes onand stays on, while the engine isrunning, this indicates that there isan OBD II problem and service isrequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle's fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement ofthe original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered bythe vehicle warranty. Thiscould also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.


This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

The following can prevent moreserious damage to the vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the key off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected.. Make sure the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑68. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle's electrical systemmight be wet. The condition isusually corrected when theelectrical system dries out.A few driving trips should turnthe light off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑64.

If none of the above have madethe light turn off, your dealer cancheck the vehicle. The dealerhas the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.


Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments have or might beginprograms to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on the vehicle.Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things to know tohelp the vehicle pass an inspection:. The vehicle will not pass this

inspection if the check enginelight is on with the enginerunning, or if the key is inON/RUN and the light is not on.

. The vehicle will not passthis inspection if the OBD II(on-board diagnostic) systemdetermines that critical emissioncontrol systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. The vehicle wouldbe considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if

the battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle's hydraulic brakesystem is divided into two parts.If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop thevehicle. For good braking though,both parts need to be working well.

If the warning light comes on, therecould be a brake problem. Have thebrake system inspected right away.


This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.If it does not, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is aproblem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set.See Parking Brake on page 9‑51for more information. The light stayson if the parking brake does notrelease fully. If it stays on after theparking brake is fully released, itmeans there is a brake problem.


If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop. The brakepedal might be harder to push, or itmight go closer to the floor. It cantake longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑90.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light will then go off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.

If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑14.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), seeBrake System Messages onpage 5‑22 for more information.

Up-Shift Light

The vehicle may have an up-shiftlight.

When this light comes on, shift tothe next higher gear if weather,road, and traffic conditions allow.

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑44 for more information.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak system or theTraction Control System (TCS)indicator/warning light comes onbriefly while starting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light will then go off.

The indicator/warning light flasheswhile the StabiliTrak or TCS systemis working to control the vehicle ona low traction surface.

If the TCS warning light comes onand stays on while driving, thevehicle needs service.

The light comes on when the TCSand the StabiliTrak system is turnedoff. If the TCS is off, wheel spin isnot limited. If the StabiliTrak systemis off, the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak system andthe warning light turns off.

See StabiliTrak System onpage 9‑53 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑52 formore information

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a tire pressuremonitoring system, this light comeson briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TirePressure Monitoring System.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or moreof the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message in theDriver Information Center (DIC),can accompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑25 formore information. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the tireloading information label. See TirePressure on page 10‑51 for moreinformation.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may bea problem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays onsteady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑53 formore information.


Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engineoil maintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and mighthave some other system problem.See your dealer.

Security Light

This light flashes when the securitysystem is activated.

For more information, see Anti-TheftAlarm System on page 2‑9.

High-Beam on Light

The high-beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑3 for moreinformation.


Cruise Control Light

This light comes on whenever thecruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑57 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC)displays information such as the tripodometer, personalization features,and warning messages. The DICdisplay is located on the instrumentpanel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on.

If a problem is detected, a warningmessage appears on the display.Pressing and releasing the tripodometer reset stem on the DICacknowledges some currentwarnings or service messages.Some messages only clear after therequired action has been taken.

The DIC has different modes whichcan be accessed by pressing thetrip odometer reset stem on the DIC.These modes are explained in thefollowing section. The DIC tripodometer reset stem is located on

the instrument panel cluster next tothe DIC display. To scroll throughthe available functions, press andrelease the reset stem.

Trip Information

Odometer

The odometer is automaticallydisplayed on the DIC when you startthe vehicle. The odometer showsthe total distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles for theUnited States or kilometers forCanada.

Trip Odometer

Press and release the reset stemuntil TRIP appears on the DICdisplay. The trip odometer showsthe current distance traveled sincethe last reset of the trip odometer ineither miles for the United States orkilometers for Canada.

To reset the trip odometer, pressand hold the reset stem until thedisplay returns to zero.


Engine Oil Life System

With the engine off, turn the keyto ON/RUN and then press thereset stem until OIL LIFE RESETappears — alternating betweenOIL LIFE and RESET — on the DICdisplay. The CHANGE OIL messagealerts you to change the oil on aschedule consistent with yourdriving conditions. Always resetthe OIL LIFE message after anoil change. To reset the message,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.

In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9 andScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Language

This feature allows you to choosethe language in which the DICdisplay shows information.

To set your choice for this feature:

1. With the engine off, turn the keyto ON/RUN, but do not start theengine.

2. Close all doors so the DOORSmessage does not display inthe DIC.

3. Momentarily press and releasethe reset stem until the currentlanguage is displayed: English(default), Spanish, or French.

4. To select a different language,press and hold the reset stemuntil the next language appears.

5. Repeat Step 4 until the desiredlanguage is displayed. Once thedesired language is shown onthe DIC display, the languageis set.

6. To exit the language selection,momentarily press and releasethe reset stem. All DICmessages will now display inthe language selected.

Automatic Door Locks

This feature allows you to programthe door locks to a preferred setting.


1. With the engine off, turn the keyto LOCK/OFF. Do not removethe key from the ignition.

2. Press and hold the power doorlock button until the DIC displayshows the current doorlock mode.


3. To view the next availablemode, press and hold the resetstem until the mode appears.Release the reset stem andpress and hold again to viewthe next mode.

4. Once the desired mode is shownon the DIC display, briefly pressthe reset stem to set yourchoice. The DIC display thenclears.

The following are the availablemodes:

Lock 1 (default): On vehicles withan automatic transmission, thismode locks all of the doors whenthe vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)and unlocks all of the doors whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

On vehicles with a manualtransmission, this mode locks all ofthe doors when the vehicle speed isgreater than 24 km/h (15 mph) andunlocks all of the doors when thekey is removed from the ignition.

Lock 2: On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, this modelocks all of the doors when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park) andunlocks the driver's door when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

On vehicles with a manualtransmission, this mode locks all ofthe doors when the vehicle speed isgreater than 24 km/h (15 mph) andunlocks the driver's door when thekey is removed from the ignition.

Lock 3: On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, this modelocks all of the doors when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).The doors will not automaticallyunlock.

On vehicles with a manualtransmission, this mode locks all ofthe doors when the vehicle speed isgreater than 24 km/h (15 mph). Thedoors will not automatically unlock.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)Feedback

This feature allows you to programthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)feedback to a preferred setting.


1. With the engine off, turn the keyto LOCK/OFF. Do not removethe key from the ignition.

2. Press and hold the lock andunlock buttons on the RKEtransmitter at the same time.Hold both buttons until the DICdisplay shows the current RKEfeedback mode.

3. To view the next availablemode, press and hold the resetstem until the mode appears.Release the reset stem andpress and hold again to viewthe next mode.

4. Once the desired mode is shownon the DIC display, briefly pressthe reset stem to set yourchoice. The DIC display thenclears.


The following are the availablemodes:

RFA 1 (default): This mode flashesthe parking lamps when you pressthe lock or unlock buttons on theRKE transmitter.

RFA 2: This mode flashes theparking lamps and sounds the hornwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter. This mode alsoflashes the parking lamps when youpress the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

RFA 3: This mode flashes theparking lamps and sounds the hornwhen you press the lock or unlockbuttons on the RKE transmitter.

RFA 4: This mode disables RKEfeedback. There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock or unlockbuttons on the RKE transmitter.

Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on theDIC to notify the driver that thestatus of the vehicle has changedand that some action may beneeded by the driver to correctthe condition. Multiple messagesmay appear one after another.The messages are displayed forseveral seconds each.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you shouldpress and release the trip odometerreset stem to acknowledge thatyou received the messages and toclear them from the display. Eachmessage must be acknowledgedindividually.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. You should take anymessages that appear on the

display seriously and remember thatclearing the messages only makesthe messages disappear, not correctthe problem.

The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayedand some information about them.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

SERVICE CHARG (Charge)SYS (System)

This message displays if there is aproblem with the battery chargingsystem. Under certain conditions,the battery warning light may alsoturn on in the instrument panelcluster. See Charging System Lighton page 5‑11. The battery will notbe charging at an optimal rate andthe vehicle will lose the ability toenter the fuel economy mode.


The vehicle is safe to drive,however have the electrical systemchecked by your dealer. Pressand release the reset stem toacknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

Brake System Messages

ABS (Antilock Brake System)FAULT

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS). Check the ABS assoon as possible and have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.See Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑50 and Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) Warning Light onpage 5‑15 for more information.Press and release the reset stemto acknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

BRAKES

This message displays if there is aproblem with the brakes. Check thebrakes as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Brakes on page 10‑26and Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑14 for more information.Press and release the reset stemto acknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

FLUID

This message displays if the brakefluid is low. Check the brake fluidas soon as possible and have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.See Brake Fluid on page 10‑27 formore information. Press and releasethe reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay.

HSA (Hill Start Assist) ON

This message displays when theHill Start Assist is enabled. See HillStart Assist (HSA) on page 9‑52 formore information.

PARK BRK (Brake)

This message displays when theparking brake is set. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑51 and BrakeSystem Warning Light onpage 5‑14 for more information.The message clears from thedisplay after the parking brake isreleased or by pressing andreleasing the reset stem.

Door Ajar Messages

DOORS

This message displays when one ormore of the doors is ajar. Check allthe doors on the vehicle to makesure they are closed. The messageclears from the display after all ofthe doors are closed.


Engine Cooling SystemMessages

AC (Air Conditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohigh and the air conditioning inthe vehicle needs to be turned off.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑22 and Climate ControlSystems on page 8‑1 for moreinformation. This message displaysalong with the ENG HOT message.

ENG (Engine) HOT

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature ishot. Check the engine coolanttemperature gauge. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑9 . Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soonas possible if you suspect theengine is overheating. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑22 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE OIL

This message displays when theoil needs to be changed. Checkthe oil in the vehicle as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10‑9 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 formore information. Press and releasethe reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay.

OIL

This message displays when the oilpressure is low. See Engine OilPressure Light on page 5‑17 andEngine Oil on page 10‑9 for moreinformation.

Engine Power Messages

REDUCED POWER

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but thereis no reduction in performance,proceed to your destination.The performance may be reducedthe next time the vehicle is driven.The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this messageis on, but acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealerfor service as soon as possible.Press and release the reset stemto acknowledge the message andclear it from the display.


Fuel System Messages

FUEL CAP

This message displays if thevehicle's fuel cap is either off orloose. Pull over as soon as possibleand check to see if the fuel cap issecure. You may also see the checkengine light on the instrument panelcluster. If the check engine lightdoes come on when the fuel capwas loose, it may take a few drivingtrips before the light turns off.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑12 for more information ifthe light still remains on. Pressand release the reset stem toacknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

LOW FUEL

This message displays if the level offuel in the vehicle is low. Also checkthe fuel gauge. See Fuel Gauge onpage 5‑8 for more information.Refill the fuel tank as soon aspossible.

Lamp Messages

TURN SIGNAL

This message displays when theturn signal is on for about 1.2 km(0.75 miles) of travel. Pressand release the reset stem toacknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STAB (Stability)SYS (System)

This message displays if there isa problem with the StabiliTrak®

system. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer. See StabiliTrakSystem on page 9‑53 for moreinformation.

STAB (Stability)SYS (System) OFF

This message displays when theStabiliTrak® system is turned off.See StabiliTrak System onpage 9‑53 for more information.

TRAC (Traction) OFF

This message along with thetraction off light displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off by pressing the TCSbutton. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 9‑52 and TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak®

Light on page 5‑16 for moreinformation.


TRACTION FAILED

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). Check the TCS assoon as possible and have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.See Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on page 5‑16 formore information. Press and releasethe reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERV (Service) VEH (Vehicle)

This message displays if the vehicleneeds service. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon aspossible.

Tire Messages

LOW TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a low tirepressure is detected in any of thevehicle's tires. Press and releasethe reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay. The message appears ateach ignition cycle until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflationpressure. See Tires on page 10‑44and Tire Pressure on page 10‑51 formore information on tires and thecorrect inflation pressures.

SERV (Service)TPM (Tire Pressure Monitor)

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly.The tire pressure light also flashes

and then remains on during thesame ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑16.Several conditions may cause thismessage to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑53 for more information.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer.

Transmission Messages

SERV (Service)4WD (Four-Wheel Drive)

This message displays whenthere is a problem with the transfercase control system. Check thetransfer case on the vehicle andhave it serviced by your dealer.See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9‑46 for more informationabout the transfer case. Pressand release the reset stem toacknowledge the message andclear it from the display.


Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of Industryand Science Canada.

The FCC Grant of EquipmentAuthorization Certificate number isCB2SAHL3.

The Canadian Registration IDnumber is 2791021849A.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use the Universal HomeRemote with any garage dooropener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Home Remote. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist you withprogramming the Universal HomeRemote.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the saleof the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for securitypurposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in thissection.

When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-head orgate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate that is beingprogrammed.


It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in yourhand-held transmitter for quickerand more accurate transmission ofthe radio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalHome Remote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515or go to www.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressand hold down the two outsidebuttons at the same time,releasing only when theUniversal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds. This step willerase the factory settings or allpreviously programmed buttons.

Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and donot repeat this step to programthe remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm(1 to 3 inches) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicatorlight in view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of your garagedoor opener receiver (motorhead unit).

3. At the same time, press andhold both the Universal HomeRemote button to be used tocontrol the garage door and thehand-held transmitter button.Do not release the UniversalHome Remote button or thehand-held transmitter button untilStep 4 has been completed.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 3 with theprocedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.


4. The indicator light on theUniversal Home Remote willflash slowly at first and thenrapidly after Universal HomeRemote successfully receivesthe frequency signal from thehand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trainedUniversal Home Remote buttonand observe the indicator light.. If the indicator light stays

on continuously, theprogramming is completeand the garage door shouldmove when the UniversalHome Remote button ispressed and released.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 6 through 8.

. If the Universal HomeRemote indicator lightblinks rapidly fortwo seconds and thenturns to a constantlight, continue with theprogramming Steps 6through 8.

It may be helpful to haveanother person assist withthe remaining steps.

6. After Steps 1 through 5 havebeen completed, locate insidethe garage the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). Locate the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name andcolor of the button may vary bymanufacturer.

7. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Afteryou press this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 8.


8. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdthe Universal Home Remotebutton, selected in Step 3 tocontrol the garage door, fortwo seconds, and then releaseit. If the garage door does notmove, press and hold thesame button a second time fortwo seconds, and then releaseit. Again, if the door does notmove, press and hold thesame button a third time fortwo seconds, and then release.

The Universal Home Remoteshould now activate thegarage door.

To program the remainingtwo Universal Home Remotebuttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming the Universal HomeRemote System.” Do not repeatStep 1, as this will erase allprevious programming from theUniversal Home Remote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or needhelp programming the UniversalHome Remote System, call1-800-355-3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not belong enough for Universal HomeRemote to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming a gateoperator or garage door opener byusing the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures,regardless of where you live,replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with thefollowing:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonwhile you press and releaseevery two seconds (cycle) thehand-held transmitter button untilthe frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by theUniversal Home Remote. TheUniversal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” to complete the trainingprocedure.


Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using Universal Remote

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator lightwill come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteButtons

All programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Remote device:

1. Press and hold down thetwo outside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote Button

To reprogram any of thethree Universal Remote buttons,repeat the programming instructionsearlier in this section, beginning withStep 2.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices on page 13‑3.

Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Off-Road Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Lighting FeaturesExit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamps control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

O (Exterior Lamps): Turn thecontrol to select one of thefour exterior lamp positions.

6-2 Lighting

9 (Off): Turns all exterior lampsand the Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) off. This is a momentarycontrol that returns to AUTO whenreleased. The DRL does not turn offon vehicles first sold in Canada,unless the following conditionsare met:. The vehicle has an automatic

transmission.. The gear position is in P (Park).. The headlamp switch is turned

to9.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on and off automatically,together with the following:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

Due to the momentary control, theautomatic headlamps may bedisabled even if the control is in theAUTO position.

To enable automatic lighting, do anyof the following:. Turn the headlamp control from

AUTO to off and release thecontrol. It returns to the AUTOposition by itself.

. Turn the headlamp control fromthe parking lamp or headlampposition to AUTO.

To disable automatic lighting, do anyof the following:. Turn the headlamp control from

AUTO to off and release thecontrol. It returns back to theAUTO position by itself.

. Turn the headlamp control fromAUTO to the parking lamp orheadlamp position.

See Automatic Headlamp Systemon page 6‑4 for more information.

Vehicles first sold in Canada with anautomatic transmission cannot turnoff automatic headlamps unless thegear position is in P (Park) and theheadlamp control is turned to O.

Vehicles first sold in Canada with amanual transmission can turn offthe automatic headlamps with theheadlamp control; however, theparking lamps will remain on.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps, together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

The headlamps can be switchedfrom low to high beam by pushingthe turn signal/lane change levertoward the instrument panel.

Lighting 6-3

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA headlamp reminder chime willsound if the following conditionsare met:. The driver door is open.. Parking lamps or headlamps are

manually turned on.. The key is either not in the

ignition switch, or it is in theLOCK/OFF position of theignition switch.

The headlamp reminder cannot beturned off if the conditions listedabove are met.

In the automatic mode, theheadlamps turn off once the ignitionis in ACC/ACCESSORY.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you to turnthe high beams on.

Pull the lever towards you to returnto low beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassPull the turn signal lever toward you,then release it, to signal that you aregoing to pass.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps will turnon. They stay on as long as thelever is held toward you. Thehigh-beam indicator on theinstrument panel cluster will comeon. Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

6-4 Lighting

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The transmission is not in

P (Park), if the vehicle has anautomatic transmission.

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

When the DRL are on, no otherlamps are on. The instrument panelwill not be lit up either. For vehiclesfirst sold in Canada, if parking lampsare manually turned on, DRL willstay on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemchanges from DRL to theheadlamps.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

To turn off the DRL, see ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1 .

Vehicles first sold in Canadacannot turn off DRL unless certainconditions are met. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system turnson after the transmission has beenshifted from P (Park) to D (Drive).The headlamps, taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, roofmarker lamps, and the instrumentpanel lights turn on at normalbrightness. The radio lights willbecome dimmer when theheadlights are off compared towhen the headlights are on.

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel. Do not cover the sensor,or the system will be on wheneverthe ignition is on.

The system can turn on theheadlamps when driving in aparking garage, through a tunnel orwhen there is overcast weather.This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp system so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automaticheadlamp system will only beaffected when the light sensordetects a change in lighting lastinglonger than the delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes about one minute for theautomatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside.

Lighting 6-5

During that delay, the instrumentpanel cluster may not be as brightas usual. Make sure the instrumentpanel brightness control is in thefull bright position. See InstrumentPanel Illumination Control onpage 6‑7 .

Hazard Warning Flashers| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button located on theinstrument panel, to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble.

Press| again to turn theflashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal alane change. Hold it there until thechange is completed.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.For bulb replacement, see BulbReplacement on page 10‑35. For ablown fuse or circuit breaker, seeFuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑39.

Turn Signal On Chime

If a turn signal is left on for morethan 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURNSIGNAL will also appear in the DIC.To turn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

See “TURN SIGNAL” under LampMessages on page 5‑24.

6-6 Lighting

Fog LampsThe fog lamp button is located in theexterior lamps control.

# (Fog Lamps): The headlampsor parking lamps must be on for thefog lamps to work. Press # to turnthe fog lamps on or off. An indicatorlight turns on when the fog lampsare on.

Never use the fog lamps in the darkwithout turning on the headlamps.

When the high-beam headlampsare turned on, the fog lamps turn offautomatically. When the high-beamheadlamps are turned off, the foglamps come on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Off-Road LampsFor vehicles with off-road lamps,they provide auxiliary lighting whenthe vehicle is used off road. Theselamps are not intended to be usedin place of existing vehicle lighting.They are not to be used on anypublic street or highway and are tobe covered when not in use. Checkyour state and local laws beforeinstalling or using any auxiliarylighting. In some states it may benecessary to remove the roof lampswhen operating the vehicle on thehighway.

The off-road lamps button is locatedon the instrument panel below theclimate controls.

Remove the covers from the lampsand press the button to turn themon or off. An indicator light turns onwhen the lamps are on.

Lighting 6-7

Notice: Turning on the off-roadlamps before removing the lampcovers could damage the off-roadlamps and the covers. Alwaysremove the covers before turningon the off-road lamps.

The off-road lamps remain on evenafter the ignition is turned off. Theoff-road lamp button must bepressed to turn them off.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThe instrument panel brightnessthumbwheel is next to the exteriorlamp control.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Turn the thumbwheelup or down to brighten or dim theinstrument panel lights and the radiodisplay. The instrument panel lights,cluster, and radio display do not dimto complete darkness. Turn thethumbwheel all the way up to turnthe dome lamps on.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps are located in thefront area of the vehicle. There isalso a dome lamp in the cargo areaof the H3 model only.

Turn the thumbwheel, located nextto the exterior lamps control, allthe way up to turn the dome andfootwell lamps on.

The dome lamp in the cargo areaautomatically turns off when:. The shift lever is shifted

out of P (Park) (automatictransmissions).

. The parking brake is released(manual transmissions).

6-8 Lighting

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated below the exterior lampscontrol.

E (Dome Lamp Override): Pressthe button in to turn the lamps off.In this position, the dome lamps willremain off when the doors are open.To return the lamps to automaticoperation, pressE again andreturn it to the out position. With thebutton in this position, the domelamps will come on when a door isopened.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located inthe overhead console.

Press the button located next toeach lamp to turn them on or off.

These lamps will not come on withthe dome lamps.

Lighting Features

Exit LightingThe interior lamps come on whenthe key is removed from the ignition.The lamps will not come on if thedome override button is pressed in.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

Lighting 6-9

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays,it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑18.

Battery Power ProtectionThe dome lamp is shut off if it is lefton for more than 20 minutes whenthe ignition is in LOCK/OFF. Thishelps to prevent the battery frombeing drained.

6-10 Lighting

2 NOTES

Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-10Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-10

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

IntroductionDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods couldcause a crash resulting in injuryor death to you or others. Do notgive extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the vehicle'sengine, radio, or other systems,and could damage them. Followfederal rules covering mobileradio and telephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑35 for moreinformation.

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the separate NavigationSystem manual.

7-2 Infotainment System

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate andLOCKED displays if the radio isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

When the ignition is in the offposition, a blinking red light on theupper left side of the radio indicatesthat THEFTLOCK® is armed.

Operation

Single CD Radio


Six-Disc CD Radio

The vehicle has one of these radiosas its audio system.

Playing the Radio

P (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Turn to increase or to decrease thevolume.

DISP (Display): Press to:. Display the time when the

ignition is off.. Change between the track

number and the elapsed timeduring CD playback.

. Select between showing thepreset number and the EQnumber on the Six-Disc CDRadio.

. Retrieve four differentcategories of information whilein XM™ mode related to thecurrent song or channel: Artist,Song Title, Category or PTY(program type), ChannelNumber/Channel Name.

To change the default display:

1. Press DISP until the desireddisplay is shown.

2. Press and hold DISP fortwo seconds and the radioproduces one beep. Theselected display becomes thedefault.

Audio Settings

AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press andrelease to select customizedequalization settings designed forcountry/western, jazz, talk, pop,rock, and classical.


AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume):This adjusts the radio volume tocompensate for road and windnoise.

To set Automatic Volume:

1. Adjust the volume at the desiredlevel.

2. Press AUTO VOL to selectLOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. Eachhigher setting allows for morevolume compensation at fastervehicle speeds.

To turn automatic volume off,press AUTO VOL until AVOL OFFdisplays.

Tone and Speaker Controls

To adjust all tone and speakercontrols to the center setting, pressand hold e until CEN or ALLCENTERED displays and the radiobeeps once.

Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

To adjust Bass/Treble:

Press and release e until BASS orTREB displays.

. Turn e to increase or todecrease the level.

. To set the Bass or Treble tothe center setting, press andhold e until the radiobeeps once.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

To adjust the Balance:

Press and release e until BALdisplays.

. Turn e to move the soundtoward the right or the leftspeakers.

. To adjust the balance to thecenter setting, press andhold e until the radiobeeps once.

To adjust the Fade:

Press and release e until FAD orFADE displays

. Turn e to move the soundtoward the front or the rearspeakers.

. To set the fade to the centersetting, press and hold e untilthe radio beeps once.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error):Displays if the radio is no longerconfigured properly for the vehicle.The vehicle must be returned toyour dealer for service.

LOCKED: Displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has lockedup. The vehicle must be returned toyour dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly orcannot be corrected, contact yourdealer.


Radio

AM-FM Radio

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to select FM1, FM2,AM, XM1, if equipped, or XM2,if equipped.

Manual Tuning

Single CD Radio:

e (Tune): Turn to select a radiostation.

Six-Disc CD Radio:


Automatic Tuning


t SEEKu : Press and release togo to the previous or next stationand stay there. The radio only stopsat stations with a strong signal.

Press and hold to scan stations orpreset stations.

To scan stations:

1. Press and hold t oru for morethan two seconds. SC or SCANdisplays and the radio beepsonce. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station.

2. Press t oru again or one ofthe pushbuttons to stopscanning presets.

To scan preset stations:

1. Press and hold t oru formore than four seconds. PSC orPSCN displays and the radiobeeps twice. The radio goesto a preset station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to thenext preset station.



Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,and six AM, six XM1, if equipped,and six XM2, if equipped), andequalization settings for eachstation can be programmed on thesix numbered pushbuttons.

To program presets:




4. Press AUTO EQ to select theequalization.

5. Press and hold one of thesix numbered pushbuttonsuntil the radio beeps once.



Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

For vehicles with XM, it is a satelliteradio service that is based in the48 contiguous United States and10 Canadian provinces. XM SatelliteRadio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast-to-coast, and indigital-quality sound. A servicefee is required to receive the XMservice. For more information,contact XM at xmradio.com orcall 1-800-929-2100 in theU.S. and xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information current XMstation when 4 is shown on thedisplay. When the completemessage has shown, 4 disappearsfrom the display. The last messagecan be viewed until a new messageis received or the station ischanged.. Parts of the message appear

every three seconds if the entiremessage cannot be shown onthe display at once.

. Press and release 4 to manuallyscroll through the message.

. When 4 is pressed and amessage is not available fromthe station, NO INFO is shownon the display.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to select FM1, FM2,AM, XM1, or XM2.

Manual Tuning

Single CD Radio:

e (Tune): Turn to select a radiostation.

Six-Disc CD Radio:


Automatic Tuning


t SEEKu : Press and release togo to the previous or next stationand stay there. The radio only stopsat stations with a strong signal.

Press and hold to scan stations orpreset stations.


To scan stations:

1. Press and hold t oru for morethan two seconds. SC or SCANdisplays and the radio beepsonce. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station.


To scan preset stations:

1. Press and hold t oru for morethan four seconds. PSC orPSCN displays and the radiobeeps twice. The radio goes to apreset station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextpreset station.


Finding a Category (CAT) Station

To select an XM station by categoryfor the Single CD Radio:

1. Press CAT to select acategory mode.

2. Press CAT repeatedly to changethe category.

3. Press t oru to select thefirst station in the category.

4. To go to another station in theselected category:. Press CAT once if the

category is displayed.. Press CAT twice if the

category is not displayed.

5. Press CAT to exit program typeselect mode. If CAT times outand is no longer on the display,go back to Step 1.

If the desired program type cannotbe found, NONE or NOT FOUNDdisplays and the radio returns to theprevious station.

To select an XM station by categoryfor the Six-Disc CD Radio:

1. Press CAT to select acategory mode.

2. Turn e to select a category.

3. Press t oru to select thefirst station in the category.

4. Press t oru to go to anotherstation within the category ifcategory is displayed. If CATtimes out and is no longer on thedisplay, go back to Step 1.

5. Press CAT to exit program typeselect mode.

If the desired program type cannotbe found, NONE or NOT FOUNDdisplays and the radio returns to theprevious station.



Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2,and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2)and equalization settings for eachstation can be programmed on thesix numbered pushbuttons.

To program presets:




4. Press AUTO EQ to select theequalization.

5. Press and hold one of thesix numbered pushbuttons untilthe radio beeps once.


XM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by calling1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating: The encryption code inthe receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

CH Off Air: This channel is notcurrently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

CH Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

CH Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

No Info: No artist, song title,category, or text information isavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

Not Found: There are no channelsavailable for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked: The XM receiver inthe vehicle may have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingthe vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, thismessage will alternate with the XMRadio 8 digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.


Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there may be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Chk XMRcvr: If this message doesnot clear within a short period oftime, the receiver may have a fault.Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mile). Althoughthe radio has a built-in electroniccircuit that automatically works toreduce interference, some staticcan occur, especially around tallbuildings or hills, causing the soundto fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on.This interference causes anincreased level of static whilelistening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to the radio,unplug the cellular phone and turnit off.


Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base.If the mast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tightenby hand until fully seated plusone quarter turn.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system maybe affected if the sunroof is open.

Audio Players

CD PlayerThe CD player can play smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring.

A CD in the player it stays in theplayer when the ignition is turnedoff. When the ignition or radio isturned on, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

Care of CDs

Store CDs in their original cases orother protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight and dust. TheCD player scans the bottom ofthe disc. If the bottom of a CD isdamaged it may not play properly orat all. Do not touch the bottom of aCD while handling it. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is dirty, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral

detergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a CD, it couldget caught in the CD player. Use amarking pen to write on the top ofthe CD if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, theycould damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.


Loading and Ejecting CDs

Single CD Radio

To load a CD:. To Insert a CD with the ignition

on, insert the CD partway intothe slot, label side up, until theplayer pulls the CD in. The CDbegins playing automatically.

. To insert a CD with the ignitionoff, press theZ (Eject) buttonor the DISP knob first.

The CD symbol displays when a CDis inserted, and the track numberdisplays just before the track startsto play.

Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD.Eject can be used with either theignition or radio off.

Six-Disc CD Radio

To load CDs:

LOAD: Press to load CDs into theCD player.

To insert one CD:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOADbutton.

3. Wait for the indicator light to turngreen.

4. Insert the CD partway into theslot, label side up, until theplayer pulls the CD in. The CDbegins playing automatically.

To insert multiple CDs:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD buttonfor two seconds. The radiobeeps once, the indicator lightflashes, and MULTI LOAD #displays.

3. Load a CD once INSERT CD #displays and the light stopsflashing and turns green. Insertthe CD partway into the slot,label side up, until the playerpulls the CD in.

4. Repeat step 3 to load theremaining CDs.

To load more than one CD butless than six, complete Steps 1through 3. When finished loadingCDs, press the LOAD button tocancel the loading function. Thelast CD loaded begins playingautomatically.

Z (Eject): Press to eject CD(s).

Press and releaseZ to eject theCD that is currently playing.

To eject multiple CDs:

1. Press and holdZ forfive seconds. A beep soundsand the indicator light begins toflash and EJECT ALL displays.

2. Remove the CD when REMOVECD # displays and the lightstops flashing.

Once the CD is removed, theindicator light begins flashingagain and another CD ejects.

To stop ejecting the CDs,press LOAD orZ.


The CD is automatically pulledback into the player if the CD is notremoved after 25 seconds. Pushinga CD back into the player, beforethe 25 second time period iscomplete causes the player tosense an error and the CD playertries to eject the CD several timesbefore stopping.

PressingZ repeatedly after tryingto push a CD in manually causesthe CD players 25-second ejecttimer to reset. Wait for the timer toexpire before pressingZ again.

Playing CDs

Single CD Radio

B (CD): Press to play a CD whilelistening to the radio.

1r (Previous): Press to go to thestart of the current track after morethan eight seconds have played.Press or hold 1r more than onceto continue moving backwardthrough the CD.

2[ (Next): Press to go to the next

track. Press or hold 2[ more thanonce to continue moving forwardthrough the CD.

4y (Random): Press to hearthe tracks in random order.Press 4y again to turn offrandom play.

t SEEKu : Press to go to thestart of the current or the previoustrack. Press u to go to the start ofthe next track. To continue movingbackward or forward through thetracks press and hold t oru,or press multiple times.

Six-Disc CD Radio

B (CD): Press to play a CD whilelistening to the radio.

r (Reverse): Press to reversewithin the track.

[ (Fast Forward): Press to fastforward within the track.

t SEEKu : Press t to go to thestart of the current track, if morethan ten seconds have played.Press u to go to the next track.To continue moving backward orforward through the tracks pressand hold t oru, or press multipletimes.

Press and hold t oru for morethan two seconds until SCANdisplays and a beep sounds toscan one CD. The radio goes tothe next track, plays for 10 seconds,then goes to the next track.Press t oru again, to stopscanning.

Press and hold t oru for morethan four seconds until ALL CDSCAN displays and a beep soundsto scan all loaded CDs. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds ofthe first track of each loaded CD.Press t oru again, to stopscanning.


N (Repeat): One track or anentire CD can be repeated.. Press and releaseN to repeat

the current track. RPT TRACK #displays. Press again to turn offrepeat play.

. Press and holdN fortwo seconds to repeat thecurrent CD. RPT CD # displays.Press again to turn offrepeat play.

y (Random): All the tracks on oneCD or all the CDs can be played inrandom order.. Press and release y to play all

the tracks on one CD in randomorder. RANDOM ONE displays.Press again to turn offrandom play.

. Press and hold y for more thantwo seconds to play the trackson all of the CDs that are loadedin random order. A beep soundsand RANDOM ALL displays.Press again to turn offrandom play.

R (Song List): The Song Listfeature can save 20 track selections.

To save tracks:

1. If S-LIST is displayed,pressR to turn it off.

2. Select the desired CD bypressing the numberedpushbutton and then useu toselect the track to be saved.

3. Press and holdR fortwo seconds, two beeps soundto confirm the track is saved intomemory.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for savingother selections.

S-LIST FULL displays if more than20 selections are tried to be stored.

To play tracks:

1. PressR. One beep sounds andS-LIST displays. The recordedtracks begin to play in the orderthey were saved

2. Press t oru to go back orforward within the saved tracks.

To delete tracks:

1. PressR to turn song list on.S-LIST displays.

2. Press either SEEK arrow toselect the desired track to bedeleted.

3. Press and holdR fortwo seconds. Two beeps soundto confirm that the track hasbeen deleted.

After a track has been deleted, theremaining tracks are moved up thelist. When another track is added tothe song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.


To delete the entire song list:

1. PressR to turn song list on.S-LIST displays.

2. Press and holdR for more thanfour seconds. One beep soundsand S-LIST EMPTY displays toconfirm that the song list hasbeen deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song listcontains saved tracks from that CD,those tracks are automaticallydeleted from the song list. Anytracks saved to the song list againare added to the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, presstheR button. One beep soundsand S-LIST is removed from thedisplay.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD comes out,it could be for one of the followingreasons:. The CD player is very hot. When

the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. Wait aboutan hour and try again.

. The format of the CD might notbe compatible.

. A problem may have occurredwhile burning the CD.

. The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.


Phone

BluetoothVehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth capable cellphone with a Hands Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Thesystem can be used while the key isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft.).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones are guaranteedto work with the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem. See gm.com/bluetooth formore information on compatiblephones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes throughthe vehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the g button, located on thedriver side of the instrument panelnear the headlamp controls, tooperate the in-vehicle Bluetoothsystem.

g (Push To Talk): Press to answerincoming calls, to confirm systeminformation, and to start speechrecognition.


Pairing

A Bluetooth enabled cell phonemust be paired to the in‐vehicleBluetooth system first and thenconnected to the vehicle before itcan be used. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,if available. Refer to the OnStarowner's guide for more information.

Pairing Information:. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. The in‐vehicle Bluetooth systemautomatically links with the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder the phone was paired.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the in‐vehicleBluetooth system at a time.

. Pairing should only need to becompleted once, unless changesto the pairing information havebeen made or the phone isdeleted.

To link to a different paired phone,see Linking to a Different Phonelater in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and release g. Thesystem responds with “Ready”followed by a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth”. The systemresponds with “Bluetooth ready”followed by a tone.

3. Say “Pair”. The system respondswith instructions and a four digitPIN number. The PIN numberwill be used in Step 4.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that will be paired tothe vehicle. Reference the cellphone manufacturers user guidefor information on this process.

Locate the device named“General Motors” in the list onthe cellular phone and follow theinstructions on the cell phone toenter the four digit PIN numberthat was provided in Step 3.

5. The system prompts for a namefor the phone. Use a name thatbest describes the phone. Thisname will be used to indicatewhich phone is connected. Thesystem then confirms the nameprovided.

6. The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 foradditional phones to be paired.


Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones



3. Say “List”. The system lists allthe paired Bluetooth devices.If a phone is connected to thevehicle, the system will say “Isconnected” after the connectedphone.

Deleting a Paired Phone



3. Say “Delete”. The system askswhich phone to delete followedby a tone.

4. Say the name of the phone tobe deleted. If the phone nameis unknown, use the “List”command for a list of all pairedphones. The system respondswith “Would you like to delete<phone name>? Yes or No”followed by a tone

5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.The system responds with“OK, deleting <phone name>”.

Linking to a Different Phone



3. Say “Change phone”. Thesystem responds with “Pleasewait while I search for otherphones”.. If another phone is found,

the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected”.

. If another phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing Name Tags

The system can store up tothirty phone numbers as nametags that are shared between theBluetooth and OnStar systems.

The system uses the followingcommands to store and retrievephone numbers:. Store. Digit Store. Directory


Using the Store Command

The store command allows a phonenumber to be stored withoutentering the digits individually.


2. Say “Store”. The systemresponds with “Store, numberplease” followed by a tone.

3. Say the complete phone numberto be stored at once with nopauses.. If the system recognizes

the number it responds with“OK, Storing” and repeatsthe phone number.

. If the system is unsure itrecognizes the phonenumber, it responds with“Store” and repeats thenumber followed by“Please say yes or no”.

If the number is correct, say“Yes”. If the number is notcorrect, say “No”. Thesystem will ask for thenumber to be re‐entered.

4. After the system stores thephone number, it responds with“Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds with “About to store<name tag>. Does thatsound OK?”.. If the name tag does not

sound correct, say “No” andrepeat Step 5.

. If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. Afterthe number is stored thesystem returns to themain menu.

Using the Digit Store Command

The digit store command allows aphone number to be stored byentering the digits individually.


2. Say “Digit Store”. The systemresponds with “Please say thefirst digit to store” followed bya tone.

3. Say the first digit to be stored.The system will repeat back thedigit it heard followed by a tone.Continue entering digits until thenumber to be stored is complete.. If an unwanted number is

recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

. To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time andthe system will repeat them.


4. After the complete number hasbeen entered, say “Store”. Thesystem responds with “Pleasesay the name tag” followed bya tone.

5. Say a name tag for the phonenumber. The name tag isrecorded and the systemresponds with “About to store<name tag>. Does thatsound OK?”.. If the name tag does not

sound correct, say “No” andrepeat Step 5.

. If the name tag soundscorrect, say “Yes” and thename tag is stored. Afterthe number is stored thesystem returns to themain menu.

Using the Directory Command

The directory command lists all ofthe name tags stored by the system.To use the directory command:


2. Say “Directory”. The systemresponds with “Directory” andthen plays back all of the storedname tags. When the list iscomplete, the system returns tothe main menu.

Deleting Name Tags

The system uses the followingcommands to delete name tags:. Delete. Delete all name tags

Using the Delete Command

The delete command allows specificname tags to be deleted.

To use the delete command:


2. Say “Delete”. The systemresponds with “Delete, pleasesay the name tag” followed bya tone.


3. Say the name tag to be deleted.The system responds with“Would you like to delete, <nametag>? Please say yes or no”.. If the name tag is correct,

say “Yes” to delete thename tag. The systemresponds with “OK, deleting<name tag>, returning tothe main menu.”

. If the name tag is incorrect,say “No”. The systemresponds with “No. OK, let'stry again, please say thename tag.”

Using the Delete All Name TagsCommand

The delete all name tags commanddeletes all stored phone book nametags and route name tags forOnStar (if present).

To use the delete all name tagscommand:


2. Say “Delete all name tags”. Thesystem responds with “You areabout to delete all name tagsstored in your phone directoryand your route destinationdirectory. Are you sure you wantto do this? Please say yesor no.”. Say “Yes” to delete all

name tags.. Say “No” to cancel the

function and return to themain menu.

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands:. Dial. Digit Dial. Call. Re‐dial

Using the Dial Command


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Dial using <phone name>.“Number please” followed bya tone.


3. Say the entire number withoutpausing.. If the system recognizes

the number, it respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number.

. If the system does notrecognize the number, itconfirms the numbersfollowed by a tone. If thenumber is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, Dialing” and dialsthe number. If the numberis not correct, say “No”.The system will ask for thenumber to be re‐entered.

Using the Digit Dial Command


2. Say “Digit Dial”. The systemresponds with “Digit dial using<phone name>, please say thefirst digit to dial” followed bya tone.

3. Say the digits to be dialed one ata time. Following each digit, thesystem will repeat back the digitit heard followed by a tone.

4. Continue entering digits until thenumber to be dialed is complete.After the whole number hasbeen entered, say “Dial”. Thesystem responds with “OK,Dialing” and dials the number.. If an unwanted number is

recognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time toclear the last number.

. To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time andthe system will repeat them.


Using the Call Command


2. Say “Call”. The system respondswith “Call using <phone name>.Please say the name tag”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag of the personto call.. If the system clearly

recognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, calling,<name tag>” and dials thenumber.

. If the system is unsureit recognizes the rightname tag, it confirms thename tag followed by atone. If the name tag iscorrect, say “Yes”.

The system responds with“OK, calling, <name tag>”and dials the number. If thename tag is not correct, say“No”. The system will askfor the name tag to bere‐entered.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the Re‐dial Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. Thesystem responds with “Re‐dialusing <phone name>” and dialsthe last number called from theconnected Bluetooth phone.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle. Pressand release g to answer the call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

. Press and release g to answeran incoming call when anothercall is active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press and release g again toreturn to the original call.

. To ignore the incoming call,continue with the original callwith no action.


Three‐Way Calling

Three‐Way Calling must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier to work.

1. While on a call press andrelease g. The system respondswith “Ready” followed by a tone.

2. Say “Three‐way call”. Thesystem responds with“Three‐way call, please saydial or call”.

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press g to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

To end a call:


2. Say “End Call”. The call is thenended.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To Mute a Call


2. Say “Mute Call”. The systemresponds with “Call muted”.

To Cancel Mute


2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”.The system responds with“Resuming call”.

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system andthe cell phone.

To Transfer Audio to the CellPhone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:


2. Say “Transfer Call.” The systemresponds with “Transferring call”and the audio will switch fromthe vehicle to the cell phone.


To Transfer Audio to the In-VehicleBluetooth System

The cellular phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after thekey is turned to the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY position.

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press g for more thantwo seconds. The audio switchesfrom the cell phone to the vehicle.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice Pass‐Thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

This feature can be used to verballyaccess contacts stored in the cellphone.



3. Say “Voice”. The systemresponds with “OK, accessing<phone name>”.. The cell phone's normal

prompt messages will gothrough its cycle accordingto the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers and numbers storedas name tags during a call. This isused when calling a menu drivenphone system. Account numberscan be programmed into thephonebook for retrieval during menudriven calls.

Sending a Number During a Call


2. Say “Dial”. The system respondswith “Say a number to sendtones” followed by a tone.


3. Say the number to send.. If the system clearly

recognizes the number itresponds with “OK, SendingNumber” and the dial tonesare sent and the callcontinues.

. If the system is not sure itrecognized the numberproperly, it responds “DialNumber, Please say yes orno?” followed by a tone.If the number is correct, say“Yes”. The system respondswith “OK, Sending Number”and the dial tones are sentand the call continues.

Sending a Stored Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Send name tag.” Thesystem responds with “Saya name tag to send tones”followed by a tone.

3. Say the name tag to send.. If the system clearly

recognizes the name tag itresponds with “OK, Sending<name tag>” and the dialtones are sent and the callcontinues.

. If the system is not sure itrecognized the name tagproperly, it responds “Dial<name tag>. Please sayyes or no?” followed by atone. If the name tag iscorrect, say “Yes”. Thesystem responds with “OK,Sending <name tag>” andthe dial tones are sent andthe call continues.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephonebook and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theabove sections on Deleting a PairedPhone and Deleting Name Tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for FCC information.


2 NOTES

Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation of the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Temperature Control

B. Fan Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. Recirculation

F. Rear Window Defogger

9 (Off): Turn the fan control to thisposition to turn the fan off. Air stillenters the vehicle and increaseswith vehicle speed depending onthe mode and temperature settings.Turn on the recirculation mode tostop this airflow.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature of the air in the vehicle.

8-2 Climate Controls

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflow inthe vehicle. The airflow can be setbetween modes.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\(Bi-Level): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets, and theremaining air to the floor outletsand the defroster and side windowoutlets. Cooler air is directed to theupper outlets and warmer air to thefloor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, side window outlets,and defroster. Recirculation is notavailable in this mode.

/ (Floor/Defog): This clears thewindows of fog and moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, sidewindow, and floor outlets. Thesystem runs the air conditioningunless the outside temperature isnear freezing or below. Recirculationis not available in this mode.

0 (Defrost): This clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side windowoutlets. The system runs the airconditioning system unless theoutside temperature is near orbelow freezing. Recirculation isnot available in this mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning systemon or off. An indicator light comeson when the air conditioning isturned on. This system cools anddehumidifies the air entering thevehicle.

The air conditioning will notfunction if the fan is turned off.If air conditioning is selected withfan off, the indicator light flashesthree times and then turns off.

A slight change in engineperformance may occur when theair conditioning compressor shutsoff and turns on again. This isnormal. The system is designedto make adjustments to help withfuel economy while still maintainingthe selected temperature.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, sowater might drip under the vehiclewhile idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

Climate Controls 8-3

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off.An indicator light comes on whenthe recirculation is on. This moderecirculates and helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle. It canbe used to prevent outside air andodors from entering the vehicle.

Recirculation is available in thebi-level and vent modes. This modecannot be selected while in the floor,floor/defog or defrost modes. If youtry to select the recirculation mode,the indicator flashes three timesindicating it is not available in thatmode. When the recirculation modeis turned on, the air conditioningturns on automatically.

When it is hot enough outside, therecirculation mode may turn onautomatically to help improvecooling performance. The indicatorlight will be lit to show this mode isactive. If the recirculation button ispressed while in this mode, the lightflashes three times and stays on toindicate that recirculation may notbe shut off.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger usesa warming grid to remove fog orfrost from the rear window when thekey is in the ignition and turned toON/RUN.

= (Rear Defogger): Press to turnthe rear window defogger on or off.After the button is first pressed therear window defogger stays on forabout 15 minutes. If turned onagain, the defogger only runs forabout seven and one-half minutes.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

8-4 Climate Controls

Air VentsUse the air outlets located in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel to direct theairflow.

Move the louvers up or down tochange the direction of the airflow.Use the thumbwheel under theoutlets to change the direction ofthe airflow from left to right.

Operation Tips. Use the recirculation mode for

maximum air conditioningperformance.

. Clear away any ice, snow orleaves from the air inlets at thebase of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-HUMMER approvedhood deflectors may adverselyaffect the performance of thesystem.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-22Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-23Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-26Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-33Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 9-36Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-41

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-44

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-52

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Locking Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Object Detection SystemsRear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-64Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-65California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65

9-2 Driving and Operating

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-65Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-66Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78Trailer Recommendations . . . . 9-81

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” Thefirst step in driving defensively isto wear your safety belt, see SafetyBelts on page 3‑10.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.


Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's systemcan make crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control ofthe vehicle. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑52 andStabiliTrak System on page 9‑53.

Adding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑14.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But that isonly an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration. Buteven in three‐fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft).


That could be a lot of distance inan emergency, so keeping enoughspace between the vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the conditionof the road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

Steering

Power Steering

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve, andthen accelerate gently into thestraightaway.


Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because thereis no room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform very wellin emergencies like these. Firstapply the brakes. See Braking onpage 9‑3 . It is better to removeas much speed as possible froma collision. Then steer aroundthe problem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder isonly slightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that the vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement.


Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm(3 to 5 inches), about one-eighthturn, until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn thesteering wheel to go straight downthe roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try your best toavoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.


Off-Road DrivingThe airbag system is designed towork properly under a wide range ofconditions, including off‐road usage.Always wear your safety belt andobserve safe driving speeds,especially on rough terrain.

Drinking and driving can be verydangerous on any road and this iscertainly true for off-road driving.At the very time you need specialalertness and driving skills, yourreflexes, perceptions, and judgmentcan be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have aserious — or even fatal — accidentif you drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking.

Off-roading can be great fun but hassome definite hazards. The greatestof these is the terrain itself. Whenoff-road driving, traffic lanes are notmarked, curves are not banked, andthere are no road signs. Surfacescan be slippery, rough, uphill,or downhill.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers. Failure to operate thevehicle correctly off‐road couldresult in loss of vehicle control orvehicle rollover.

Off-roading involves some newskills. That is why it is veryimportant that you read thesedriving tips and suggestions tohelp make off-road driving saferand more enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-Roading. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work done.. Make sure there is enough fuel,

that fluid levels are where theyshould be, and that the sparetire is fully inflated.

. Be sure to read all theinformation aboutfour-wheel-drive vehiclesin this manual.

. Make sure all underbodyshields, if the vehicle has them,are properly attached.

. Know the local laws that applyto off-roading where you willbe driving or check with lawenforcement people in the area.

. Be sure to get the necessarypermission if you will be onprivate land.


Loading Your Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ WARNING

. Cargo on the load floor piledhigher than the seatbackscan be thrown forward duringa sudden stop. You or yourpassengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top ofthe seatbacks.

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or yourpassengers can be struckby flying objects. Securethe cargo properly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof. Keep cargo in thecargo area as far forward andlow as possible.

There are some important things toremember about how to load yourvehicle.. The heaviest things should be

on the floor, forward of the rearaxle. Put heavier items as farforward as you can.

. Be sure the load is properlysecured, so things are nottossed around.

You will find other importantinformation under Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑27 and Tires onpage 10‑44.

Environmental Concerns

Off-road driving can providewholesome and satisfyingrecreation. However, it alsoraises environmental concerns.We recognize these concernsand urge every off-roader to followthese basic rules for protecting theenvironment:. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenspecially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving andobey all posted regulations.

. Avoid any driving practicethat could damage shrubs,flowers, trees, or grasses ordisturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking downtrees, or unnecessary drivingthrough streams or over softground.


. Always carry a litter bag andmake sure all refuse is removedfrom any campsite beforeleaving.

. Take extreme care with openfires (where permitted), campstoves, and lanterns.

. Never park your vehicle overdry grass or other combustiblematerials that could catch firefrom the heat of the vehicle'sexhaust system.

Traveling to Remote Areas

It makes sense to plan your trip,especially when going to a remotearea. Know the terrain and planyour route. Get accurate maps oftrails and terrain. Check to see ifthere are any blocked or closedroads.

It is also a good idea to travel withat least one other vehicle in casesomething happens to one of them.

For vehicles with a winch, be sureto read the winch instructions. In aremote area, a winch can be handyif you get stuck but you will want toknow how to use it properly.

High Mobility Characteristics

The H3 has a 22.3 cm (8.8 inch)running ground clearance (A), a23.4 cm (9.2 inch) axle to groundclearance (B), and a low center ofgravity.

The H3T has a 24.1 cm (9.5 inch)running ground clearance (A), a22.1 cm (8.7 inch) axle to groundclearance (B), and a low center ofgravity.


The H3 has an approximateapproach angle (A) of 37.4 degreesand an approximate departureangle (B) of 34.7 degrees,depending on suspensionpackages.

The H3T has an approximateapproach angle (A) of 37.1 degreesand an approximate departureangle (B) of 31 degrees, dependingon suspension packages.

Design specifications required aminimum gradeability of 60%(31 degrees) slope, with thevehicle fully loaded, on high frictionsurfaces with maximum vehiclespeed not to exceed 9.7 km/h(6 mph). The vehicle is expected totraverse this grade only for shortdurations. Never stop and idle thevehicle or park it on this grade.

The vehicle should be able totraverse a 40% (22 degrees) sideslope at 9.7 km/h (6 mph) while fullyloaded on high friction surfaces.


The vehicle can climb a 40.6 cm(16 inch) vertical step. Step climbingis best done by approaching thestep at an angle rather thanstraight on.

Brake and AcceleratorOperation Techniques forOff-Road Driving

For logs, walls, rocks, severeditches, hills, sand, etc.

1. Bring the vehicle to a completestop. Do not rev the engine.

2. Select the proper transmissionand transfer case gearrange; usually 1 (First) gear,Four‐Wheel‐Low Lock forsuch obstacles.

3. If wheel spin is experienced,maintain steady throttle, withyour foot off the brake pedal,to allow the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) to control thewheel spin. TCS might notoperate if the brakes areapplied.

4. If wheel spin cannot becontrolled by the TCS system,fully press the brake pedal withyour left foot so all wheel spin isstopped.

5. Back away from the obstacle sothat a new approach can betried.

6. As the first wheel crossesthe obstacle, be prepared toalternate the brake andaccelerator pedal to maintaincontrol and avoid tire drop-offfrom obstacles. Repeat thisprocess for the other wheels.


For mounds, washouts, looseup-hill slopes, ditches, etc.

When wheel spin occurs as thevehicle is moving, the drivermay notice a slight shaking orshuddering of the vehicle. Thisshould be stopped as soon aspossible to prevent damage tovehicle components. This is theindication that a loss of traction isoccurring on this terrain. Theoperator should:

1. Reduce speed and apply thebrakes.

2. Assess the terrain properly andadjust vehicle speed and gearranges accordingly: Four‐WheelHigh position for higher speedsand Four‐Wheel‐Low Lock formore torque and lower speeds.Transmission 1 (First) gear isgenerally recommended.

3. Apply slight pressure to thebrake when the shaking orshuddering sensation is felt,keeping the vehicle moving ina controlled manner.

4. Be prepared to alternatebetween braking andaccelerating through theadverse terrain.

Getting Familiar with Off-RoadDriving

It is a good idea to practice in anarea that is safe and close to homebefore you go into the wilderness.Off-roading requires some new anddifferent skills.

Tune your senses to different kindsof signals. Your eyes need toconstantly sweep the terrain forunexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire orengine sounds. Use your arms,hands, feet, and body to respond tovibrations and vehicle bounce.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed. At higherspeeds:. You approach things faster and

have less time to react.. There is less time to scan the

terrain for obstacles.. The vehicle has more bounce

when driving over obstacles.. More braking distance is

needed, especially on anunpaved surface.

{ WARNING

When you are driving off-road,bouncing and quick changes indirection can easily throw youout of position. This could causeyou to lose control and crash.So, whether you are driving onor off the road, you and yourpassengers should wear safetybelts.


Scanning the Terrain

Off-road driving can take you overmany different kinds of terrain. Befamiliar with the terrain and its manydifferent features.

Surface Conditions: Off-roadingsurfaces can be hard-packed dirt,gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,snow, or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the vehicle's steering,acceleration, and braking in differentways. Depending on the surface,slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,delayed acceleration, poor traction,and longer braking distances canoccur.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen orhidden obstacles can be hazardous.A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump canstartle you if you are not preparedfor them. Often these obstacles arehidden by grass, bushes, snow,or even the rise and fall of theterrain itself.

Some things to consider:. Is the path ahead clear?. Will the surface texture change

abruptly up ahead?. Does the travel take you uphill or

downhill?. Will you have to stop suddenly

or change direction quickly?

When driving over obstacles orrough terrain, keep a firm grip onthe steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,or other surface features can jerkthe wheel out of your hands.

When driving over bumps, rocks,or other obstacles, the wheels canleave the ground. If this happens,even with one or two wheels, youcannot control the vehicle as well orat all.

Because you will be on an unpavedsurface, it is especially important toavoid sudden acceleration, suddenturns, or sudden braking.

Off-roading requires a different kindof alertness from driving on pavedroads and highways. There are noroad signs, posted speed limits,or signal lights. Use good judgmentabout what is safe and what is not.


Crossing Obstacles

Approach Angle — a Key toMobility

If you encounter a large dip in theterrain, do not enter straight on;enter at an angle — 15° minimumapproach (A), 75° maximumapproach angle (B). For very largedips, ditches or small washes, coastin, using the engine as a brake(transmission and transfer caselowest gears). Then, use the lowranges in the transmission andtransfer case to power out.

Roll The Tires Over Large Rocks

Do not straddle large rocks; driveover them, letting the tire cover therock. The tread of the tire is thickerand tougher than the sidewall of thetire and is more resilient to impactthan underbody components.

Log Crossing

Using the proper technique,the vehicle will cross logs up to25.4 cm (10 inches) in diameter.Approach the log at approximately a15° angle (A) with the transmissionin 1 (First) and the transfer case inFour‐Wheel‐Low Lock and “walk”

the vehicle over, one tire at a time.It may be necessary to modulatethe brake pedal and accelerator toavoid spin-out. Ease the vehicledown from the log with the brake.

Driving on Hills

Off-road driving often takes you up,down, or across a hill. Driving safelyon hills requires good judgmentand an understanding of what thevehicle can and cannot do. Thereare some hills that simply cannot bedriven, no matter how well built thevehicle.


{ WARNING

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. If you drive upthem, you will stall. If you drivedown them, you cannot controlyour speed. If you drive acrossthem, you will roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed.If you have any doubt about thesteepness, do not drive the hill.

Approaching a Hill

When you approach a hill, decide ifit is too steep to climb, descend,or cross. Steepness can be hard tojudge. On a very small hill, forexample, there may be a smooth,constant incline with only a smallchange in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top.On a large hill, the incline may getsteeper as you near the top, but youmight not see this because the crestof the hill is hidden by bushes,grass, or shrubs.

Consider this as you approach a hill:. Is there a constant incline,

or does the hill get sharplysteeper in places?

. Is there good traction on thehillside, or will the surface causetire slipping?

. Is there a straight path up ordown the hill so you will nothave to make turningmaneuvers?

. Are there obstructions on the hillthat can block your path, suchas boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?

. What is beyond the hill? Is therea cliff, an embankment, adrop-off, a fence? Get out andwalk the hill if you do not know.It is the smart way to find out.

. Is the hill simply too rough?Steep hills often have ruts,gullies, troughs, and exposedrocks because they are moresusceptible to the effects oferosion.

See Hill Start Assist (HSA) onpage 9‑52 for information onvehicles stopped on a grade.

Driving Uphill

Once you decide it is safe to driveup the hill:. Use transmission and transfer

case low gear and get a firm gripon the steering wheel.

. Get a smooth start up the hilland try to maintain speed. Notusing more power than neededcan avoid spinning the wheels orsliding.

. Let the traction system work tocontrol any wheel slippage. Thetraction control system allows formoderate wheel spin with somecapability to dig in and power upthe hill.


. Do not continue if the vehicleshudders or exhibits suspensionhopping. This can causedamage to the driveline orsuspension components.Improper driving technique is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.

{ WARNING

Turning or driving across steephills can be dangerous. You couldlose traction, slide sideways, andpossibly roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. Whendriving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

. Try to drive straight up the hill ifat all possible. If the path twistsand turns, you might want to findanother route.

. Ease up on the speed as youapproach the top of the hill.

. Attach a flag to the vehicle to bemore visible to approachingtraffic on trails or hills.

. Sound the horn as you approachthe top of the hill to let opposingtraffic know you are there.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible to oncoming traffic.

{ WARNING

Driving to the top (crest) of ahill at full speed can cause anaccident. There could be adrop-off, embankment, cliff,or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

If the vehicle stalls, or is about tostall, and you cannot make it upthe hill:. Push the brake pedal to stop

the vehicle and keep it fromrolling backwards and apply theparking brake.

. If the engine is still running, shiftthe transmission to R (Reverse),release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill inR (Reverse).

. If the engine has stoppedrunning, you need to restart it.With the brake pedal pressed,apply the parking brake. If thevehicle has an automatictransmission, shift thetransmission to P (Park).Restart the engine. Then, shiftto R (Reverse), release theparking brake, and slowly backdown the hill as straight aspossible in R (Reverse).


. While backing down the hill, putyour left hand on the steeringwheel at the 12 o'clock positionso you can tell if the wheels arestraight and can maneuver asyou back down. It is best to backdown the hill with the wheelsstraight rather than in the left orright direction. Turning the wheeltoo far to the left or right willincrease the possibility of arollover.

Things not to do if the vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, when going upa hill:. Never attempt to prevent a stall

by shifting into N (Neutral) torev-up the engine and regainforward momentum. This willnot work. The vehicle can rollbackward very quickly and couldgo out of control.

. Never try to turn around if aboutto stall when going up a hill.If the hill is steep enough to stallthe vehicle, it is steep enoughto cause it to roll over. If youcannot make it up the hill, backstraight down the hill.

If, after stalling, you try to backdown the hill and decide you justcannot do it, set the parking brake.If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, shift to P (Park). Turnoff the engine. Leave the vehicleand go get some help. Exit on theuphill side and stay clear of the paththe vehicle would take if it rolleddownhill. Do not shift the transfercase to Neutral when you leave thevehicle. Leave it in some gear.

{ WARNING

Shifting the transfer case toNeutral can cause your vehicle toroll even if the transmission is inP (Park). This is because theNeutral position on the transfercase overrides the transmission.You or someone else could beinjured. If you are going to leaveyour vehicle, set the parkingbrake and shift the transmissionto P (Park). But do not shift thetransfer case to Neutral.


Driving Downhill

When off-roading takes youdownhill, consider:. How steep is the downhill?

Will I be able to maintain vehiclecontrol?

. What is the surface like?Smooth? Rough? Slippery?Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

. Are there hidden surfaceobstacles? Ruts? Logs?Boulders?

. What is at the bottom of the hill?Is there a hidden creek bank oreven a river bottom with largerocks?

If you decide you can go downa hill safely, try to keep the vehicleheaded straight down. Use a lowgear so engine drag can help thebrakes so they do not have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keepingthe vehicle under control at alltimes.

{ WARNING

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply thebrakes lightly when descending ahill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.

Things not to do when driving downa hill:. When driving downhill, avoid

turns that take you across theincline of the hill. A hill that is nottoo steep to drive down might betoo steep to drive across. Thevehicle could roll over.

. Never go downhill with thetransmission in N (Neutral),called free-wheeling. The brakeswill have to do all the work andcould overheat and fade.

Vehicles are much more likely tostall when going uphill, but if ithappens when going downhill:

1. Stop the vehicle by applying theregular brakes and apply theparking brake.

2. With an automatic transmission,shift to P (Park). While stillbraking, restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, releasethe parking brake, and drivestraight down.

4. If the engine will not start, getout and get help.


Driving Across an Incline

An off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. To decidewhether to try to drive across theincline, consider the following:

{ WARNING

Driving across an incline that istoo steep will make your vehicleroll over. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it.Find another route instead.

. A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steepto drive across. When goingstraight up or down a hill, thelength of the wheel base — thedistance from the front wheels tothe rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumbleend over end. But when driving

across an incline, the narrowertrack width — the distancebetween the left and rightwheels — might not prevent thevehicle from tilting and rollingover. Driving across an inclineputs more weight on the downhillwheels which could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline evenworse. If you drive across a rockwith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

For these reasons, carefullyconsider whether to try to driveacross an incline. Just because thetrail goes across the incline doesnot mean you have to drive it. Thelast vehicle to try it might haverolled over.

If you feel the vehicle starting toslide sideways, turn downhill.This should help straighten outthe vehicle and prevent the sideslipping. The best way to preventthis is to “walk the course” first, soyou know what the surface is likebefore driving it.


Stalling on an Incline

{ WARNING

Getting out on the downhill (low)side of a vehicle stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If thevehicle rolls over, you could becrushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

If the vehicle stalls when crossingan incline, be sure you, and anypassengers, get out on the uphillside, even if the door there is harderto open. If you get out on thedownhill side and the vehicle startsto roll over, you will be right inits path.

If you have to walk down the slope,stay out of the path the vehicle willtake if it does roll over.

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

When you drive in mud, snow,or sand, the wheels do not get goodtraction. Acceleration is not asquick, turning is more difficult, andbraking distances are longer.

It is best to use a low gear when inmud — the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. In really deep mud,keep the vehicle moving so it doesnot get stuck.

When driving on sand, wheeltraction changes. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sanddunes, the tires will tend to sinkinto the sand. This affects steering,accelerating, and braking. Drive at areduced speed and avoid sharpturns or abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offerthe worst tire traction. On thesesurfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, thetraction is so poor that you will havedifficulty accelerating. And, if thevehicle does get moving, poorsteering and difficult braking cancause it to slide out of control.

{ WARNING

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous.Underwater springs, currentsunder the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehiclecould fall through the ice andyou and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.


Driving in Water

{ WARNING

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, andyou could lose traction and rollthe vehicle over. Do not drivethrough rushing water.

Heavy rain can mean flash flooding,and flood waters demand extremecaution.

Find out how deep the water isbefore driving through it. Do nottry it if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe — you probably will not getthrough. Deep water can damagethe axle and other vehicle parts.The vehicle is capable of depths upto 50 cm (20 inches). Know how tojudge whether the water is deeperthan this before proceeding into it.

If the water is not too deep, driveslowly through it. At faster speeds,water splashes on the ignitionsystem and the vehicle can stall.Stalling can also occur if you get thetailpipe under water. If the tailpipe isunder water, you will never be ableto start the engine. When goingthrough water, remember that whenthe brakes get wet, it might takelonger to stop. See Driving on WetRoads on page 9‑22.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody,chassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the engine and oil coolersfor mud accumulation. Thoroughlyand carefully clean these devicesto allow proper cooling. Checkthe body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

The vehicle requires more frequentservice due to off-road use. Referto the Maintenance Schedule foradditional information.


Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well ina quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the roadis wet enough and you are goingfast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑44.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicleand rest.


Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Going down steep or long hills,shift to a lower gear.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Be alert —something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.


Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑50 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideService on page 13‑5. To get helpand keep everyone in thevehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)


WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(two inches) on the side ofthe vehicle that is away fromthe wind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑40.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and killyou. You cannot see it or smell it,so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.


If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph) asshown on the speedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑64.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission,between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. Therecovery loops can be used. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑90.

Recovery Loops

{ WARNING

These loops, when used, areunder a lot of force. Keep peopleaway from the vicinity of the loopsand any chains or cables duringuse. Always pull the vehiclestraight out. Never pull on theloops at a sideways angle. Theloops could break off and you orothers could be injured from thechain or cable snapping back.

Notice: Never use the recoveryloops to tow the vehicle. Thevehicle could be damaged andit would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.


The vehicle has two recovery loopsat the front of the vehicle and one atthe rear of the vehicle.

Use them if the vehicle is stuckoff-road and needs to be pulled tosome place where the driver cancontinue driving.

If the vehicle has a brush guard,never tow or apply any loads ontothe brush guard.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory-installed options.

Two labels on the vehicleshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you tolose control and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.


Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B‐pillar). With the driverdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door latchpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seating

positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also showsthe size of the vehicle's originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑44 and TirePressure on page 10‑51.

There is also importantinformation on the Certification/Tire label. It tells Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) andthe Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for the front and rearaxles. See “Certification/TireLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.


4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbsand there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing onpage 9‑74 for importantinformation on towing atrailer, towing safety, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).


Example 2

A. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 2 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

C. Available CargoWeight = 113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 3 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

C. Available CargoWeight = 0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,cargo and any accessories orequipment added to the vehicleafter it left the factory shouldnever exceed the vehicle'scapacity weight.


Certification/Tire Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to thebottom section of the driver side

center pillar (B-pillar) or on theend of the driver side instrumentpanel. The label shows theGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, cargo and trailertongue weight, if pulling a trailer.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells the maximum weights forthe front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rear

axles, go to a weigh station andweigh the vehicle. Your dealercan help with this. Be sure tospread out the load equally onboth sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If the load is heavy, it should bespread out.


Similar appearing vehicles mayhave different GVWRs andcapacity weights. Please notethe vehicle's Certification/Tirelabel or consult your dealer foradditional details.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you tolose control and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not changethe weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load thevehicle the right way.

Notice : Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle – like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse – they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.


There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving”under Off-Road Driving onpage 9‑7.

Truck-Camper LoadingInformationThe vehicle was neitherdesigned nor intended to carrya slide-in type camper.

Notice : Adding a slide-incamper or similar equipmentto the vehicle can damageit, and the repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not install aslide-in camper or similarequipment on the vehicle.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Keep your speed at 88 km/h(55mph) or less for thefirst 805 km (500miles).

. Do not drive at anyone constant speed, fastor slow, for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles)or so. During this time thenew brake linings are notyet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑70 for thetrailer towing capabilitiesof the vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.


Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply theregular brake pedal.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

(A) LOCK/OFF: This positionlocks the ignition. It also locksthe transmission on automatictransmission vehicles. It locksthe steering wheel on manualtransmission vehicles. The key canonly be removed in LOCK/OFF.

On vehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein P (Park) to turn the ignition switchto LOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, then the vehicle needsservice.

(B) ACC/ACCESSORY: This is theposition in which you can operatethe electrical accessories or itemsplugged into the accessory poweroutlets. On automatic transmissionvehicles, this position unlocks theignition. On manual transmissionvehicles, it unlocks the ignition and

steering wheel. Use this positionif the vehicle must be pushed ortowed.

(C) ON/RUN: This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. The switchstays in this position when theengine is running. The transmissionis also unlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.

If you leave the key in theACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition with the engine off, thebattery could be drained. You maynot be able to start the vehicle if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

(D) START: This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.


A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 20 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Front Wipers. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped)

These features will work whenthe key is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY. Once thekey is turned from ON/RUN toLOCK/OFF, these features continueworking for up to 20 minutes or untila door is opened.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in theproper gear.

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be inN (Neutral) and the parking brakeengaged. Hold the clutch pedaldown to the floor and start theengine. The vehicle will not startif the clutch pedal is not all theway down.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allowthe oil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue crankingfor a few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the enginedoes not start and the key isheld in START for manyseconds, cranking will bestopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage.


To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter 5‐10 seconds, especiallyin very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be floodedwith too much gasoline. Pushthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor a maximum of 15 seconds.

Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool. Whenthe engine starts, let go of thekey and accelerator. If thevehicle starts briefly but thenstops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at leastfour hours before starting. Aninternal thermostat in the plug-endof the cord may exist which willprevent engine coolant heateroperation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0° F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrapthe electrical cord. The cordis located in the enginecompartment behind theunderhood fuse block on thedriver side of the vehicle.


3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord to prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑70.

1. Hold the brake pedal down, thenset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake onpage 9‑51 for more information.

{ WARNING

With all-wheel drive, the vehiclewill be free to roll— even if theshift lever is in P (Park)— if thetransfer case is in Neutral. So, besure the transfer case is in a drivegear, four-wheel high (4H) orfour-wheel low (4L)— not inNeutral.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pressing the shift lever buttonand moving the lever as farforward as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key from theignition.


Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running (AutomaticTransmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), holdthe regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) withoutfirst pressing the shift lever button.If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into P (Park)”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released, and

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park) unlessthe ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and theregular brake pedal is applied.


The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of aan uncharged or low voltage (lessthan 9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑86 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Then press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift outof P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

ParkingIf the vehicle has a manualtransmission, before you get out ofthe vehicle, move the shift lever intoR (Reverse), and firmly apply theparking brake. Once the shift leverhas been placed into R (Reverse)with the clutch pedal pressed in,turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,remove the key and release theclutch.

If you are parking on a hill, or ifthe vehicle is pulling a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑70.


Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.


Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑40.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenit is on fairly level ground, alwaysset the parking brake and movethe automatic transmission shiftlever to P (Park), or the manualtransmission shift lever to Neutral.

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑37and Parking on page 9‑39.

If pulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑70.

AutomaticTransmission

The automatic transmission has ashift lever on the console.


It features an electronic shiftposition indicator within theinstrument cluster.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best positionto use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑37. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑70.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply theregular brakes first and then pressthe shift lever button before you canshift from P (Park) when the ignitionkey is in ON/RUN. If you cannotshift out of P (Park), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shiftlever all the way into P (Park) asyou maintain brake application.Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever intoanother gear. See Shifting Out ofPark on page 9‑38.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.


To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, seeIf the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑26.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding, see “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑6.

D (Drive) can be used when towinga trailer. You may want to shiftthe transmission to 3 (Third) or,if necessary, a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often underheavy loads or in hilly conditions.

3 (Third): This position is alsoused for normal driving. However itreduces vehicle speed more thanD (Drive) without using the brakes.You might choose 3 (Third) insteadof D (Drive) when driving on hilly orwinding roads, or when towing atrailer, so there is less shiftingbetween gears, or when going downa steep hill.


2 (Second): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than3 (Third) without using the brakes.You can use 2 (Second) on hills.It can help control vehicle speed asyou go down steep mountain roads,but then you would also want to usethe brakes off and on.

1 (First): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than2 (Second) without using the brakes.You can use it on very steep hills,or in deep snow or mud. If the shiftlever is put in 1 (First) while thevehicle is moving forward, thetransmission will not shift intofirst gear until the vehicle is goingslowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tiresor holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using onlythe accelerator pedal maydamage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.

Hill Start Assist

H3 and H3T vehicles have a HillStart Assist feature, which may beuseful when stopped on a grade.See Braking on page 9‑3 for moreinformation.

Manual Transmission

This is the shift pattern.

Vehicles with a manual transmissionoperate as described below:

1 (First): Press the clutch pedaland shift into 1 (First). Then slowlylet up on the clutch pedal asyou slowly press down on theaccelerator pedal.


You can shift into 1 (First) whenyou are going less than 30 km/h(20 mph). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shiftinto 1 (First), put the shift lever inNeutral and let up on the clutch.Then press the clutch pedal backdown and shift into 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth):Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and5 (Fifth) the same way you do for2 (Second). Slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.

Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine.

R (Reverse): To back up, stop thevehicle. Press the clutch pedal andshift into R (Reverse). Slowly let upon the clutch pedal as you pressthe accelerator pedal. If it is hardto shift, let the shift lever return toNeutral and release the clutchpedal. Then press the clutch againand shift into R (Reverse). Do notattempt to shift into the fifth gearposition prior to shifting intoR (Reverse). The transmission hasa lock out feature which prevents a5 (Fifth) gear to R (Reverse) gearshift.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

Use R (Reverse), along with theparking brake, for parking thevehicle.

Up-Shift Light

This light will show you when to shiftto the next higher gear for best fueleconomy.

When this light comes on, youcan shift to the next higher gear ifweather, road and traffic conditionspermit. For the best fuel economy,accelerate slowly and shift when thelight comes on.

While you accelerate, it is normalfor the light to go on and off if youquickly change the position of theaccelerator. Ignore the shift lightwhen you downshift.

Disregard the shift light when thetransfer case is in four-wheel low.

For more information, see Up-ShiftLight on page 5‑15.


Shift Speeds

{ WARNING

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could lose controlof the vehicle. You could injureyourself or others. Do not shiftdown more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

Hill Start Assist

H3 and H3T vehicles have a HillStart Assist feature, which may beuseful when stopped on a grade.See Braking on page 9‑3 for moreinformation.

Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveFull-Time Four-Wheel Drive sendsengine power to all four wheels forextra traction. To get the most out ofFull-Time Four-Wheel Drive, youmust be familiar with its operation.

Transfer Case Buttons

The transfer case buttons arelocated to the right of the instrumentpanel cluster. Use these switchesto shift into and out of the differentFull-Time Four-Wheel Drive modes.

4 m (Four-Wheel High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations. Youcan also use this setting for light orvariable off-road conditions.

N (Neutral): Shift the transfer caseto Neutral only when towing thevehicle. See Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑70 formore information.

Notice: Driving on pavementin Four-Wheel High Lock orFour Wheel Low Lock forextended periods may causepremature wear on the vehiclepowertrain and tires. Do notdrive in Four-Wheel High Lockor Four-Wheel Low Lock onpavement for extended periods.

4 m Q (Four-Wheel-High Lock):Use this setting when you needextra traction in most off-roadsituations such as sand, mud,snow or level, rocky trails.


Notice: Operating the vehiclein Four-Wheel-Low Lock above48 km/h (30mph) for anyextended period of time couldcause damage to the transfercase. Do not operate the vehiclein Four-Wheel-Low Lock above48 km/h (30mph) for extendedperiods.

4 n Q (Four-Wheel-Low Lock):This setting delivers extra torqueto all four wheels and is used forextreme off-road conditions.

If the vehicle has locking axles,they can be locked for additionaltraction in extreme off-roadsituations. See Locking Rear Axleon page 9‑54 and Locking FrontAxle on page 9‑55.

Indicator lights in the buttons showwhich setting the transfer case isin. The indicator lights will comeon briefly when the ignition is inON/RUN. The If the lights do notcome on, take the vehicle to yourdealer for service. An indicator light

will flash while shifting the transfercase. If the transfer case cannotmake a requested shift, it will returnto the last chosen setting.

If the SERV 4WD message on theDriver Information Center (DIC)stays on, take the vehicle to yourdealer for service. See Service 4WDmessage under Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑18.

Shifting between Four-Wheel Highand Four-Wheel-High Lock

With the vehicle traveling less than120 km/h (75 mph), press andrelease the Four-Wheel High orFour-Wheel-High Lock button.

It may be necessary to drivebackwards while turning for adistance of 7.5 m (25 feet) to getthe lock feature to disengage.

Shifting into Four-Wheel Low Lock

Notice: Shifting the transmissioninto gear before the indicatorlight stops flashing could causedamage to the transfer case.

Always wait until the indicatorlight stops flashing before puttingthe transmission back in gear.

To shift into Four-Wheel-Low Lock,the ignition must be in ON/RUN andthe vehicle must be stopped ormoving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission in N (Neutral).The preferred method for shiftinginto Four-Wheel Low is to havethe vehicle moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph). Press and releasethe Four-Wheel-Low Lock button.If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, the clutch pedal mustbe pressed to the floor while youpress the Four-Wheel-Low Lockbutton, or the shift will not becompleted. You must wait for theFour-Wheel-Low Lock indicator lightto stop flashing and remain lit beforeshifting the transmission into gear.

It is normal for the vehicle to haveengagement noise and bump whenshifting between Four-Wheel Lowand Four-Wheel High ranges orfrom Neutral.


If the Four-Wheel-Low Lock buttonis pressed when the vehicle is ingear and/or moving too fast, theFour-Wheel-Low Lock indicator lightwill flash for 15 seconds and notcomplete the shift.

Shifting Out ofFour-Wheel-Low Lock

Notice: Shifting the transmissioninto gear before the indicatorlight stops flashing could causedamage to the transfer case.Always wait until the indicatorlight stops flashing before puttingthe transmission back in gear.

To shift out of Four-Wheel-LowLock, the vehicle must be stoppedor moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission in N (Neutral)and the ignition in ON/RUN. Thepreferred method for shifting out ofFour-Wheel-Low Lock is to havethe vehicle moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph). Press and releasethe Four-Wheel High orFour-Wheel-High Lock button.

If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, the clutch pedalmust be pressed to the floor whileyou press the Four-Wheel Highor Four-Wheel-High Lock button,or the shift will not be completed.You must wait for the Four-WheelHigh or Four-Wheel-High Lockindicator light to stop flashingand remain lit before shifting thetransmission into gear.

It is normal for the vehicle to haveengagement noise and bump whenshifting between Four-Wheel Lowand Four-Wheel High ranges orfrom Neutral.

If the Four-Wheel High orFour-Wheel-High Lock button ispressed when the vehicle is ingear and/or moving too fast,the Four-Wheel High orFour-Wheel-High Lock indicatorlight will flash for 15 secondsbut will not complete the shift.

Shifting Into Neutral

To shift the transfer case to Neutral:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Start the vehicle.

3. Put the transmission inN (Neutral). If the vehicle has amanual transmission, press andhold the clutch pedal down whileyou perform Steps 5 through 9.

4. Shift the transfer case toFour-Wheel High.

{ WARNING

Shifting an all-wheel-drivevehicle's transfer case intoNeutral can cause the vehicleto roll even if the automatictransmission is in P (Park) or themanual transmission is in anygear. You or others could beinjured. Make sure the parkingbrake is firmly set before you shiftthe transfer case to Neutral.


5. Simultaneously press andhold the Four-Wheel High andFour-Wheel-Low Lock buttonsfor 10 seconds. The Neutral lightwill come on when the transfercase shift to Neutral is complete.

6. Press and hold the regular brakepedal and shift the transmissionto R (Reverse), then shift thetransmission to D (Drive) foran automatic transmission,or 1 (First) for vehicles have amanual transmission and thenlet out the clutch. This is toensure the transfer case is inNeutral. If not, repeat thisprocedure starting at Step 3.

7. Turn the engine off.

8. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park) for an automatictransmission, or 1 (First) forvehicles that have a manualtransmission.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

Shifting Out of Neutral

To shift out of Neutral:

1. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal.

2. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral) for an automatictransmission, or press the clutchpedal for vehicles that have amanual transmission. Then turnthe ignition to ON/RUN but donot start the engine.

3. Press the button for thedesired transfer case shiftposition (Four-Wheel High,Four-Wheel-High Lock orFour-Wheel-Low Lock).

After the transfer case hasshifted out of Neutral the lightwill go out.

4. Release the parking brake.

Notice: Shifting the transmissioninto gear before the indicatorlight stops flashing could causedamage to the transfer case.Always wait until the indicatorlight stops flashing before puttingthe transmission back in gear.

5. You may start the engine andshift the transmission to thedesired position.


Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑15.

If driving safely on a wet road andit becomes necessary to slam onthe brakes and continue brakingto avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,

there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. The ABS pump or motormight be heard operating, and thebrake pedal might be felt to pulsate,but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.


Parking Brake

The parking brake pedal is locatedto the left of the regular brake pedal,near the driver door.

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal downto its fully-applied position.

A chime will sound and the brakewarning light will flash when theparking brake is applied and thevehicle is moving at least 5 km/h(3 mph) for at least three seconds.See Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑14.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down. Pullthe park brake release lever, locatedabove the parking brake pedal.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see Trailer Towingon page 9‑74.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist thedriver in stopping or decreasingvehicle speed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplementthe power brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle.


The stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsations orpedal movement during this timeis normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After the vehicleis stopped on an incline, quicklypush the brake pedal to the floorto activate Hill Start Assist.

When the system activates, achime will sound and the HSA ONmessage will be displayed. Thebrakes will automatically be heldfor a maximum of two secondswhile the driver switches fromapplying the brakes to pushingthe accelerator pedal. When HillStart Assist is active, the drivermight experience a “hard brakepedal.” This is normal and doesnot affect safe brake operation.After activation, the system willautomatically disengage when theaccelerator pedal is pressed. Donot turn off the ignition while thisfeature is active. The Hill StartAssist feature may not disengagefully if the ignition is turned off.

The system will not activate withthe transmission in P (Park), whentraveling down a steep grade in adrive gear, or if the vehicle is facinguphill with the transmission inR (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheelspin. This is especially useful inslippery road conditions. Thesystem operates only if it sensesthat any of the wheels are spinningor beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, TCS reduces enginepower. The system may be heardor felt while it is working. This isnormal and does not mean there isa problem with the vehicle.

TCS can operate on dry roadsunder some conditions. Whenthis happens, the system may beheard working or a reduction inacceleration may be noticed. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.


Examples of these conditionsinclude hard acceleration in a turn,an abrupt upshift or downshift of thetransmission or driving on roughroads.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control automaticallydisengages. The cruise controlcan be re-engaged when roadconditions allow. See Cruise Controlon page 9‑57 for more information.

TRACTION FAILED appears on theDriver information Center (DIC)when a TCS or antilock brakesystem problem has been detectedand the vehicle needs service.When this message is on, thesystem will not limit wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑18 for more information.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow,

and it is necessary to “rock” thevehicle to attempt to free it. See Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑26for more information.

To turn the system off, press andrelease the TCS/StabiliTrak button.

When TCS has been turned off, thislight comes on steady and TRACOFF appears on the DIC. This lightflashes when TCS is active.

Press and release theTCS/StabiliTrak button again toturn the system back on. The TRACOFF message then goes off.

TCS automatically comes onwhenever the vehicle is started andresets itself at each ignition cycle.

Adding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories can affect the vehicle'sperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

StabiliTrak SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists the driver with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at anyone of the vehicle's brakes to assistthe driver with keeping the vehicleon the intended path.


When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto insure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages.The cruise control can bere-engaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑57.

If there is a problem detected withStabiliTrak, a SERVICE STAB SYSmessage displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑18 for more information.When this message is displayed,the system is not working. Adjustyour driving accordingly.

StabiliTrak comes on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started andresets itself at each ignition cycle.However, when the transfer case isplaced in Four‐Wheel‐Low Lockmode, StabiliTrak is automaticallydisabled. See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9‑46 for more information.It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow,and it is necessary to “rock” thevehicle to attempt to free it. See Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑26.

This light comes on steady whenTCS has been turned off. This lightflashes when StabiliTrak is active.

To Turn off TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton until STAB SYS OFFdisplays on the DIC. Press andrelease the TCS/StabiliTrak buttonagain to turn StabiliTrak back on.

Locking Rear AxleFor vehicles with this feature,additional traction can be obtainedfrom the rear wheels when travelingin off-road situations such as mud,snow, sand, steep hills and uneventerrain.

The button used to turn thisfeature on or off is located on theinstrument panel.


To lock the rear axle, do thefollowing:

1. Place the transfer case in the4LO Lock mode. This is theonly mode which will allowthe rear axle to lock. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 9‑46for more information regardingthe transfer case and4LO Lock mode.

2. Press the rear axle lockingbutton with the vehicle movingless than 26 km/h (16 mph).

The light in the button stops flashingand remains illuminated when therear axle is locked.

Notice: If you try to lock the axlewhile the vehicle is stuck and thetires are spinning, the vehicle'sdrivetrain could be damaged.

The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Alwayslock the axle before attemptingsituations and/or navigatingterrain which could possiblycause the vehicle to becomestuck.

The locking rear axle will bedisengaged when the wheel speedis greater than 64 km/h (40 mph),if the vehicle's battery is low and/orthe transfer case is shifted out of4LO Lock mode.

Notice: If the vehicle's axleis locked while driving onpavement, the drivetrain could bedamaged. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not use the locking axle onpavement. If four-wheel drive isneeded when traveling onpavement, use only 4HI.

Locking Front AxleFor vehicles with this feature, thelocking front axle, used with thelocking rear axle, can give thevehicle additional traction whentraveling in off-road situations suchas mud, snow, sand, steep hills anduneven terrain.

The button used to turn the lockingfront axle on or off is located on theinstrument panel.

Before the front axle can be locked,the rear axle must be locked.


To lock the front and rear axles:

1. Place the transfer case in the4LO Lock mode. This is theonly mode which allows thefront and rear axles to lock.See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9‑46 for more informationregarding the transfer case and4LO Lock mode.

2. Press the rear axle lockingbutton with the vehicle movingless than 16 mph (26 km/h).

3. Wait for the light in the buttonto stop flashing and remainilluminated to show that the rearaxle is locked.

4. Press the front axle lockingbutton with the vehicle stoppedor moving less than 26 km/h(16 mph).

5. Wait for the light in the buttonto stop flashing and remainilluminated to show that the frontaxle is locked.

Notice: If you try to lock the axlewhile the vehicle is stuck and thetires are spinning, the vehicle'sdrivetrain could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Alwayslock the axle before attemptingsituations and/or navigatingterrain which could possiblycause the vehicle to becomestuck.

Locking axles will be disengagedwhen the wheel speed is greaterthan 64 km/h (40 mph), if thevehicle's battery is low and/or thetransfer case is shifted out of4LO Lock mode.

Notice: If the vehicle's axleis locked while driving onpavement, the drivetrain could bedamaged. Repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not use the locking axle onpavement. If four-wheel drive isneeded when traveling onpavement, use only 4HI.


Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

9 (Off): Turns the cruise controlsystem off.

R (On): Turns the cruise control thesystem on.

S (Resume/Accelerate): Makesthe vehicle accelerate or resume toa previously set speed.

rT (Set): Press this button to setthe speed.

Cruise control will not work if theparking brake is set, or if the mastercylinder brake fluid level is low.

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol shuts off.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control disengages, if thevehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and it begins to limitwheel spin. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑52.When road conditions allow thecruise control to be safely usedagain, it can be turned back on.


Setting Cruise Control

{ WARNING

If you leave your cruise control onwhen you are not using cruise,you might hit a button and go intocruise when you do not want to.You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want touse cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switchto on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. PressT at the end of the leverand release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

The cruise symbol on the instrumentpanel comes on when the cruisecontrol is engaged.

Resuming a Set Speed

Suppose the cruise control is set ata desired speed and then you applythe brake or step on the clutch. Thisdisengages the cruise control. But itdoes not need to be reset.

Once the vehicle is going about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, movethe cruise control switch brieflyfrom R to S.

The vehicle goes back to thechosen speed and stays there.

If the switch is held at resume/accelerate the vehicle keeps goingfaster until the switch is released orthe brake is applied. Do not hold theswitch at resume/accelerate, unlessyou want the vehicle to go faster.


Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

There are two ways to go to ahigher speed:. Use the accelerator pedal

to get to the higher speed.PressT at the end of thelever, then release the buttonand the accelerator pedal. Thevehicle will now cruise at thehigher speed. If the acceleratorpedal is held longer than60 seconds, cruise control willturn off.

. Move the cruise switchfrom R to S. Hold it there untilthe desired speed is reached,and then release the switch.To increase the vehicle speed insmall amounts, move the switchbriefly to resume/accelerate.Each time this is done, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

. Press and holdT until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in very smallamounts, briefly pressT. Eachtime this is done, the vehiclegoes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph)slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the cruisecontrol speed set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehicle'sspeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,the accelerator pedal might have tobe used to maintain the vehiclespeed. When going downhill, youmight have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehiclespeed down. When the brake isapplied the cruise control willturn off.


Ending Cruise Control

To turn off the cruise control, doone of the following:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.. Move the cruise control switch

to9.

. Lightly tap or press the clutch,if the vehicle has a manualtransmission.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speedmemory is erased, when the cruisecontrol or the ignition is turned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)Vehicles with the rear vision camerasystem are designed to help thedriver while the vehicle is backingup. The area behind the vehicle isdisplayed on the screen in theinside rear view mirror. Read thisentire section before using thecamera system.

When the key is in the ON/RUNposition and the driver shifts thevehicle into R (Reverse), the videoimage appears from inside the rearview mirror. Once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse), theimage disappears.

The display may have a guidelineoverlay that can help the driver alignthe vehicle when backing into aparking spot.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn off the rear vision camerasystem, press and holdz, locatedon the inside rearview mirror, untilthe left indicator light turns off. Therear camera vision display is nowdisabled.

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on again, press andholdz until the left indicator lightilluminates. The rear vision camerasystem display is now enabled andthe display will appear in the mirrornormally.


{ WARNING

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's field ofview, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers orwhere there could be cross-traffic.Your judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

So if you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you couldhit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.Even though the vehicle has theRVC system, always checkcarefully before backing up bychecking behind and around thevehicle.

Rear Vision Camera Location

View of H3 Camera Location

View of H3T Camera Location


The image on the screen isprovided by the camera located onthe rear bumper.

The image from the camera thatappears on the screen appearsfarther than the actual distance.The area displayed by the camerais limited. The camera does notdisplay objects which are close toeither corner of the bumper or underthe bumper. On the H3, the sparetire and carrier extends rearward ofthe rear bumper. The area displayedon the screen may vary according tovehicle orientation or roadconditions.

The following illustration showsthe field of view that the cameraprovides.

H3 Field of View

Notice: The spare tire extendsfarther away from rear of thevehicle than the trailer hitchshown on rear vision cameradisplay. The spare tire could hitan object even though thereappears to be enough distance onthe display between the trailerhitch and objects behind youcausing vehicle or propertydamage. Do not use this systemto judge the distance between thespare tire and objectsbehind you.


H3T Field of View

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does Not SeemTo Work Properly

The rear vision camera system maynot work properly or display a clearimage:. In the dark.. When the sun or the beam of

headlamps is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. If ice, snow, mud, or anythingelse builds up on the cameralens. Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. If the back of the vehicle is inan accident, the position andmounting angle of the cameramay change or the camera maybe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

. If there are extremetemperatures or extremetemperature changes.

The rear vision camera systemdisplay in the rearview mirror mayturn off or not appear as expecteddue to a loss of video signal, or novideo signal present during thereverse cycle. The display will beblank and the left indicator light willslowly flash as long as the vehicle isin R (Reverse) or until the conditionreturns to normal.

Pressing and holdingz when theleft indicator light is flashing will turnoff the video display along with theleft indicator light.


FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

The 8th digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine.

The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

If the vehicle has the 5.3LV8 engine(VIN Code P), you can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑66. In all other engines, useonly regular unleaded gasoline.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.


Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States orCAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 inCanada. Some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑65 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance might

be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑12. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United States orCanada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused byuse of improper fuel would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean,or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline. Look for the TOP TIERlabel on the fuel pump to ensuregasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developedby the auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.


For customers who do not useTOP TIER Detergent Gasolineregularly, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, addedto the fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help clean depositsfrom fuel injectors and intakevalves. GM Fuel System TreatmentPLUS is the only gasoline additiverecommended by HUMMER. It isavailable at your dealer/retailer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines mightbe available in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission controlsystem could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)The 8th digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine.The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

If the vehicle has the 5.3LV8 engine(VIN Code P), you can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).In all other engines, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑64.

Only vehicles that have the5.3LV8 engine (VIN Code P)can use 85% ethanol fuel (E85).We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.


Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuelswebsite (www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html) that canhelp you find E85 fuel. Thosestations that do have E85 shouldhave a label indicating ethanolcontent. Do not use the fuel if theethanol content is greater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798. Bydefinition, this means that fuellabeled E85 will have an ethanolcontent between 70% and 85%.Filling the fuel tank with fuelmixtures that do not meet ASTMspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

To ensure quick starts in thewintertime, the E85 fuel must beformulated properly for your climateaccording to ASTM specificationD 5798. If you have trouble startingon E85, it could be because theE85 fuel is not properly formulatedfor your climate. If this happens,switching to gasoline or addinggasoline to the fuel tank canimprove starting. For good startingand heater efficiency below 0°C(32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tankshould contain no more than 70%ethanol. It is best not to alternaterepeatedly between gasoline andE85. If you do switch fuels, it isrecommended that you add asmuch fuel as possible — do not addless than 11 L (three gallons) whenrefueling. You should drive thevehicle immediately after refuelingfor at least 11 km (seven miles) toallow the vehicle to adapt to thechange in ethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per gallonthan gasoline, so you will need torefill the fuel tank more often whenusing E85 than when you are usinggasoline. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑68.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.


Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The fuel cap is located on the driverside of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. Whilerefueling, let the fuel cap hang bythe tether, if it has one.

When reinstalling the cap, turnit clockwise until three clicks,otherwise the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp could turn on.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑12.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you couldbe badly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and waita few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑92.

When replacing the fuel cap,turn it clockwise until three clicks.Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has beenleft off or improperly installed.


This would allow fuel to evaporateinto the atmosphere. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑12.

The FUEL CAP message displayson the Driver Information Center(DIC) if the fuel cap is not properlyinstalled. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑24 formore information.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer.The wrong type fuel cap mightnot fit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp to

light, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑12.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.


Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment thathas been designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringretailer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips”.

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing”.

. For information on equipmentto tow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment”.

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑90. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle — such as a motorhome,see Recreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑90.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehiclemay also be damaged; theresulting repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer when itis equipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see Trailer Towing onpage 9‑74. Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.


With the added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies andtires are forced to work harder andunder greater loads. The trailer alsoadds wind resistance, increasingthe pulling requirements. For safetrailering, correctly use the propertrailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rulesfor your safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling A Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements with state orprovincial police.

. Consider using a sway control.See “Hitches” later in thissection.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 miles) thenew vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of thevehicle wear in at the heavierloads.

. Vehicles with an automatictransmission can tow inD (Drive). Use a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too often.For vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is better not touse the highest gear.

. This vehicle has a Hill StartAssist feature, which may beuseful when the vehicle isstopped on a grade. See HillStart Assist (HSA) on page 9‑52for more information.

. Do not drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and the lamps and trailer brakes areworking properly.


Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gomuch farther beyond the passedvehicle before returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do thisso the trailer won't strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. For this reason youmay think other drivers are seeingthe signal when they are not. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.


Vehicles with an automatictransmission can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shifts toooften under heavy loads and/orhilly conditions. For vehicles with amanual transmission, it is better notto use the highest gear.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)for a few minutes before turning theengine off. For vehicles with manual

transmissions, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission out ofgear and the parking brake applied,for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑22.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hillwith the trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet forvehicles with an automatictransmission, or into gearfor vehicles with a manualtransmission. Turn the wheelsinto the curb if facing downhillor into traffic if facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park) for vehicles with anautomatic transmission or intogear for vehicles with a manualtransmission.

5. Release the brake pedal.


Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. start the engine,. shift into a gear, and. release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Scheduleor Index for more information.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axle

lubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑22.

Trailer TowingThree important considerationshave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer.. The weight of the trailer tongue.. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weight ofthe Trailer Tongue” later in thissection for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determinehow much a vehicle can weigh,based on the vehicle model andoptions.


Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

H3

3.7L L5 Engine, AutomaticTransmission

4.56 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)

3.7L L5 Engine, ManualTransmission 4.56 3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) 8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)

5.3L V8 Engine, AutomaticTransmission

4.10 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg) 11,400 lbs (5 171 kg)

H3T

3.7L L5 Engine, AutomaticTransmission

4.56 4,400 lbs (1 996 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)

3.7L L5 Engine, ManualTransmission

4.56 2,900 lbs (1 315 kg) 8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)

5.3L V8 Engine, AutomaticTransmission

4.10 5,900 lbs (2 676 kg) 11,400 lbs (5 171 kg)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.


Ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13‑3 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑27for more information about thevehicle's maximum load capacity.

If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10‐15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B) up to amaximum of 227 kg (500 lbs).

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.Choose the shortest hitch extensionthat will position the hitch ballclosest to the vehicle. This will helpreduce the effect of trailer tongueweight on the rear axle.

If the spare tire carrier is mountedon the back of the vehicle and thehitch extension is too short, thespare tire may interfere with trailercoupling or trailer tongue jackoperation on some types of trailers.


Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is2 495 kg (5,500 lbs); 1 270 kg(2,800 lbs) at the front axle and1 225 kg (2,700 lbs) at the rearaxle. It has a GVWR of 3 266 kg(7,200 lbs), a RGAWR of 1 814 kg(4,000 lbs) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of6 350 kg (14,000 lbs). The trailerrating should be:

Expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (386 kg(850 lbs)) and because the weight isapplied well behind the rear axle,the effect on the rear axle is greaterthan just the weight itself, as muchas 1.5 times as much. The weightat the rear axle could be 386 kg(850 lbs) X 1.5 = 578 kg (1,275 lbs).

Since the rear axle already weighs1 225 kg (2,700 lbs), adding 578 kg(1,275 lbs) brings the total to1 803 kg (3,975 lbs). This is veryclose to, but within the limit forRGAWR as well. The vehicle is setto trailer up to 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs).

If the vehicle has many options andthere is a front seat passenger andtwo rear seat passengers with someluggage and gear in the vehicle aswell. 136 kg (300 lbs) could beadded to the front axle weight and181 kg (400 lbs) to the rear axleweight. The vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 3 266 kg(7,200 lbs) and you might think318 additional kilograms (700 lbs)should be subtracted from thetrailering capacity to stay withinGCWR limits. The maximum trailer

would only be 3 538 kg (7,800 lbs).You may go further and think thetongue weight should be limitedto less than 454 kg (1,000 lbs) toavoid exceeding GVWR. But theeffect on the rear axle must still beconsidered. Because the rear axlenow weighs 1 406 kg (3,100 lbs),408 kg (900 lbs) can be put onthe rear axle without exceedingRGAWR. The effect of tongueweight is about 1.5 times the actualweight. Dividing the 408 kg (900 lbs)by 1.5 leaves only 272 kg (600 lbs)of tongue weight that can behandled. Since tongue weight isusually at least 10 percent of totalloaded trailer weight, expect thatthe largest trailer the vehicle canproperly handle is 2 722 kg(6,000 lbs).

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.


Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Inflate the vehicle's tires to theupper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on theCertification label or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑27. Donot go over the GVW limit for thevehicle, or the GAWR, including theweight of the trailer tongue.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch isneeded.

The rear bumper on the vehicle isnot intended for hitches. Do notattach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Use onlya frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

Will any holes be made in the bodyof the vehicle when the trailer hitchis installed? If there are, then besure to seal the holes when thehitch is removed. If the holes are notsealed, dirt, water, and deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) from theexhaust may get into the vehicle.See Engine Exhaust on page 9‑40.

Weight-Distributing Hitches andWeight Carrying Hitches

(A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B)Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the hitch must be adjusted sothat the distance (A) remains thesame both before and after couplingthe trailer to the tow vehicle.


Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongueof the trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 680 kg (1,500 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system thatis adequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Trailer Wiring Harness

Light‐Duty Trailer Wiring Package

If the vehicle does not have atrailer towing package, the chassisharness will contain the followingblunt cut circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. White: Ground. Brown: Tail Lamps

To add a trailer towing wiringpackage, have it installed byyour dealer or a qualified servicecenter. Also, see Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑81 for moreinformation.

Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package

If the vehicle has a trailer towingpackage, the rear bumper harnesswill have a seven‐pin universalheavy‐duty trailer connectorattached to a bracket on the hitchplatform.


The trailer towing harness containsthe following seven trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps. White: Ground. Light Green: Back-up Lamps. Red: Battery Feed. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

If charging a remote (non‐vehicle)battery, turn on the headlamps toboost the vehicle system voltage toproperly charge the battery.

Four-Wire Harness Adapter

If towing a light-duty trailer witha standard four-way, flat pinconnector, an adapter is availablefrom your dealer.

Hold the adapter with the tabpointing up.

Connect the adapter to theseven‐pin universal heavy‐dutytrailer connector attached to thebracket on the hitch platform. Theflip cap on the vehicle's harnesslocks onto the tab and helps holdthe adapter in place. Plug thefour-way pin connector onto theadapter.


Trailer Brake Control WiringHarness

The trailer brake control wiringharness is located under theinstrument panel to the right of thesteering column. The wires aretaped to the harness that goesto the courtesy light under theinstrument panel. The harnesshas the following wires:. Red Wire: AUX B+. Black Wire: Ground. Light Blue Wire: Brake Signal. Dark Blue Wire: Trailer Brakes

Trailer RecommendationsSubtract the hitch loads from theCargo Weight Rating (CWR). CWRis the maximum weight of the loadthe vehicle can carry. It does notinclude the weight of the peopleinside, but you can figure about68 kg (150 lbs) for each passenger.The total cargo load must not bemore than the vehicles CWR.

Weigh the vehicle with the trailerattached, so the GVWR or GAWRare not exceeded. If using aweight-distributing hitch, weigh thevehicle without the spring bars inplace.

The best performance is obtainedby correctly spreading out theweight of the load and choosing thecorrect hitch and trailer brakes.

For more information see TrailerTowing on page 9‑74.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle battery, even if the vehicle isnot operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑40 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑40.


2 NOTES

Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-17Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-22Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-24Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-30Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-31

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps (H3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps (H3T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-37Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-44Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-63Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Tire Changing (H3T) . . . . . . . . 10-66Tire Changing (H3) . . . . . . . . . 10-75Secondary Latch System . . . 10-84Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-85

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-90Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer/retailer. You will receivegenuine parts and trained andsupported service people.

California Proposition 65WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

Vehicle Care 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inremote keyless transmitters, maycontain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer/non‐retaileraccessories to the vehicle can affectvehicle performance and safety,including such things as airbags,braking, stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation oruse of non‐certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, is

not covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

HUMMER Accessories aredesigned to complement andfunction with other systems onthe vehicle. Your HUMMERdealer/retailer can accessorize thevehicle using genuine HUMMERAccessories. When you go to yourHUMMER dealer/retailer and askfor HUMMER Accessories, you willknow that HUMMER-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuineHUMMER Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑40.

10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English andmetric fasteners can beeasily confused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much more

about how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information onpage 13‑12.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck on page 3‑41.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑11.

Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is located inside thevehicle on the lower left side ofthe instrument panel.

2. Release the secondary latch onthe hood. It is located below thefront center of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenpull the hood down and close itfirmly.

10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

3.7 L L5 Engine

Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑25.

B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑19.

C. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑17.

D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑24.

E. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick (If Equipped). See“Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑12.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10‑9.

G. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10‑18.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal(GND). See Jump Starting onpage 10‑86.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑9.

J. Positive (+) Battery Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑86.

K. Brake Fluid Reservoir.See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 10‑26.

L. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑39.

M. Battery on page 10‑28.

N. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir(If Equipped). See HydraulicClutch on page 10‑16.

10-8 Vehicle Care

5.3 L V8 Engine

Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑17.

B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (IfEquipped). See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑17.

C. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑25.

D. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑19.

E. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick (If Equipped). See“Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑12.

F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑9.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10‑9.

H. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See“Brake Fluid” under Brakes onpage 10‑26.

I. Battery on page 10‑28.

J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑24.

K. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑39.

L. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10‑18.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle mustbe on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handleis a yellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give theoil several minutes to drain backinto the oil pan. If this is notdone, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

10-10 Vehicle Care

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea (L), add at least one liter/quartof the recommended oil. Thissection explains what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.If the engine has so much oilthat the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that showsthe proper operating range, theengine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:. GM6094M

Use only an oil that meetsGM Standard GM6094M.

. SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for thevehicle. These numbers onan oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do notuse other viscosity oils suchas SAE 20W-50.

. American Petroleum Institute(API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting these requirementsshould have the starburstsymbol on the container. Thissymbol indicates that the oil hasbeen certified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oilidentified as meeting GMStandard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to usethe recommended oil can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Vehicle Care 10-11

Cold Temperature Operation

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30engine oil. Both provide easiercold starting for the engine atextremely low temperatures. Alwaysuse an oil that meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M. See “WhatKind of Engine Oil to Use” for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives / EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils with thestarburst symbol that meet GMstandards are all that is neededfor good performance and engineprotection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil changeis necessary. A “Change Oil”message comes on. See Engine OilMessages on page 5‑23. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 1 000 km (600miles). It ispossible that, if driving under thebest conditions, the oil life systemmight not indicate that an oil changeis necessary for over a year.

However, the engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once ayear and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your dealer hastrained service people who willperform this work using genuineparts and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

The Engine Oil Life Systemcalculates when to change theengine oil and filter based onvehicle use. Whenever the oil ischanged, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil changeis required. If a situation occurswhere the oil is changed prior to achange engine oil message beingturned on, reset the system.

10-12 Vehicle Care

After changing the engine oil, resetthe system:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUNwith the engine off.

2. Press and release the stemin the lower center of theinstrument cluster until the OILLIFE message is displayed.

3. Once the alternating “Oil Life”and “Reset” messages appear,press and hold the stem untilseveral beeps sound. Thisconfirms that the oil life systemhas been reset.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the “Change Oil” messagecomes on again and stays on for30 seconds at the next ignitioncycle, it did not reset. The systemneeds to be reset again.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

A good time to check the automatictransmission fluid level is when theengine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2, and besure to use the transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can be alittle difficult, you may choose tohave this done at the dealer servicedepartment.

If adding it yourself, be sure tofollow all the instructions here,or there could be a false reading onthe dipstick.

Vehicle Care 10-13

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes beforechecking the transmission fluid levelif you have been driving:. When outside temperatures are

above 32°C (90°F).. At high speed for quite a while.. In heavy traffic— especially in

hot weather.. While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluidshould be at normal operatingtemperature, which is 82°C to 93°C(180°F to 200°F).

Get the vehicle warmed up bydriving about 24 km (15 miles) whenoutside temperatures are above10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third)until the engine temperature gaugemoves and then remains steady for10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be madeafter the vehicle has been sittingfor eight hours or more with theengine off, but this is used onlyas a reference. Let the engine runat idle for five minutes if outsidetemperatures are 10°C (50°F) ormore. If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), the engine might have toidle longer. Should the fluid level below during this cold check, checkthe fluid hot before adding fluid.Checking the fluid hot gives a moreaccurate reading of the fluid level.

Checking the Fluid Level

To prepare the vehicle:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the engine running.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, position theshift lever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle forthree minutes or more.

10-14 Vehicle Care

Then, without shutting off theengine:

1. Flip the handle up and then pullout the dipstick and wipe it witha clean rag or paper towel.

The automatic transmissiondipstick handle with this symbolon it is located in the enginecompartment on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 formore information on location.

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and pull it backout again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the lower level. Thefluid level must be in the COLDarea, below the cross-hatchedarea, for a cold check or in theHOT or cross-hatched area for ahot check. Be sure to keep thedipstick pointed down to get anaccurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine what kindof transmission fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8.

Add fluid only after checking thetransmission fluid while it is hot.A cold check is used only as areference. If the fluid level is low,add only enough of the proper fluidto bring the level up to the HOT areafor a hot check. It does not takemuch fluid, generally less than onepint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Vehicle Care 10-15

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluidmay damage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑8.. After adding fluid, recheck the

fluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstick backin all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Manual TransmissionFluid

When to Check

A good time to check the manualtransmission fluid is when theengine oil is changed. However, thefluid in the manual transmissiondoes not require changing.

How to Check

Because this operation can be alittle difficult, you may choose tohave this done at your HUMMERdealer service department.

If doing it yourself, be sure to followall the instructions here, or therecould be a false reading.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Too little fluidcould cause the transmissionto overheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

To check the fluid:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelsurface, then shut the engineoff. Let the vehicle sit until thetransmission case is coolenough to touch.

2. Remove the filler plug.

3. Check that the lubricant level isup to the bottom of the fillerplug hole.

10-16 Vehicle Care

4. If the fluid level is good, installthe plug and be sure it is fullyseated. If the fluid level is low,add more fluid as described inthe next steps.

How to Add Fluid

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine what kind of fluid touse. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8.

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole.Add only enough fluid to bringthe fluid level up to the bottom ofthe filler plug hole.

3. Install the filler plug. Be sure theplug is fully seated.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in thevehicle is self-adjusting. The clutchmaster cylinder reservoir is filledwith hydraulic clutch fluid.

The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoircap has this symbol on it. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

It is not necessary to regularlycheck clutch fluid unless a leak inthe system is suspected. Addingfluid will not correct a leak.

A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to checkthe fluid level in the clutch mastercylinder reservoir and for the properfluid. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8.

How to Check and Add Fluid

The proper fluid should be added ifthe level does not reach the bottomof the diaphragm when it is in placein the reservoir. See the instructionson the reservoir cap.

Vehicle Care 10-17

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

3.7 L shown (5.3 L similar)

The engine air cleaner/filter islocated in the engine compartmenton the passenger side of thevehicle. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation on location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at theMaintenance II intervals and replaceit at the first oil change after each80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Unfasten the clips that hold thecover on and remove the cover.

2. Lift out the engine aircleaner/filter.

3. Inspect or replace the air filter.See Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11‑10 to determinewhich filter to use.

4. Reinstall the engine aircleaner/filter cover. Fasten theclips to hold the cover in place.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause youor others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

10-18 Vehicle Care

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

3.7L L5 Engine

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Engine Cooling Fan

C. Radiator Pressure Cap

5.3L V8 Engine

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Radiator Pressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fan

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there isa leak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant otherthan DEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner, at 50 000 km(30,000miles) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-19

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for five yearsor 240 000 km (150,000 miles),whichever occurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑22.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water tothe cooling system can bedangerous. Plain water, or someother liquid such as alcohol,can boil before the propercoolant mixture will. The vehicle'scoolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection upto 129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Notice: If extra inhibitorsand/or additives are used in thevehicle's cooling system, thevehicle could be damaged. Useonly the proper mixture of theengine coolant listed in thismanual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8 for moreinformation.

10-20 Vehicle Care

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

It is located toward the rear ofthe engine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable

water and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system is cool beforethis is done.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface. When the engine is cold,the coolant level should be at FULLCOLD, or a little higher. When theengine is warm, the level could beabove the FULL COLD level.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at least up to theFULL COLD mark. If it is not, therecould be a leak in the coolingsystem.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

When the coolant in the coolantrecovery tank is at the FULL COLDmark, start the vehicle.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

Vehicle Care 10-21

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids froma hot cooling system can blowout and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if youturn the surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

1. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot. Turnthe pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone full turn.

If you hear a hiss, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.

2. Keep turning the cap toremove it.

3. Fill the radiator with the properDEX‐COOL coolant mixture,up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑19 for more informationabout the proper coolantmixture.

4. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe FULL COLD mark.

5. Reinstall the cap on the coolantrecovery tank, but leave theradiator pressure cap off.

10-22 Vehicle Care

6. Start the engine and let it rununtil you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant levelinside the radiator filler neckmight be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX‐COOL coolant mixturethrough the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of thefiller neck.

8. Then replace the pressure cap.

At any time during this procedureif coolant begins to flow out ofthe filler neck, reinstall thepressure cap.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating.

A coolant temperature gauge isdisplayed on the instrument panel.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑9.

You may decide not to lift thehood when this warning appears,but instead get service help rightaway. See Roadside Service onpage 13‑5.

If you do decide to lift the hood,make sure the vehicle is parked ona level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

The air conditioning might stopworking if the engine is too hot. Thisis normal and helps cool the engine.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catchesfire because of being drivenwith no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costlyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Vehicle Care 10-23

If Steam Is Coming From TheEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when yourengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming FromThe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer. See “Driving on

Grades” under Trailer Towing onpage 9‑74.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in frontof you. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pullover, stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine untilit cools down.

10-24 Vehicle Care

Engine FanThis vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan. When the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the clutch is not engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing and/or highoutside temperatures, the fan speedincreases when the clutch engages.So you may hear an increase in fannoise. This is normal and should notbe mistaken as the transmissionslipping or making extra shifts.It is merely the cooling systemfunctioning properly. The fan willslow down when additional coolingis not required and the clutchdisengages.

You may also hear this fan noisewhen you start the engine. It will goaway as the fan clutch disengages.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unless aleak in the system is suspected oran unusual noise is heard. A fluidloss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Then remove the cap again andlook at the fluid level on thedipstick.

The level should be between theADD and FULL marks. If necessary,add only enough fluid to bring thelevel up to the proper range.

Vehicle Care 10-25

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluidis needed, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. Thisallows for fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thevehicle's windshield washersystem and paint.

10-26 Vehicle Care

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toan accident. When the brakewear warning sound is heard,have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Vehicle Care 10-27

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the liningsare worn, there will be too muchfluid when new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑14.

10-28 Vehicle Care

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:. Using the wrong fluidcan badly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilledon the vehicle's paintedsurfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for battery location.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Care 10-29

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑86 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Four-Wheel DriveIt is recommended that thefour-wheel drive transfer case fluidbe checked and filled by the dealer.

Front AxleIt is not necessary to regularlycheck front axle fluid unless a leakis suspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem.

It is recommended that the frontaxle fluid be checked and filled byyour dealer.

Rear Axle

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

A. Rear Axle

B. Filler Plug

The proper level for the rearaxle fluid is 0 mm to 10 mm(0 to 3/8 inch) below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, located on therear axle.

What to Use

See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8 todetermine which kind of lubricantto use.

10-30 Vehicle Care

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑51.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicleshould start only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlSystem Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑51.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

Vehicle Care 10-31

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but donot start the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, tryto move the shift lever out ofP (Park) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of P (Park),contact your dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. For automatic transmission

vehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park). Theignition key should come outonly in LOCK/OFF.

. For manual transmissionvehicles, the ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shiftto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

10-32 Vehicle Care

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removedin different ways. For proper typeand length, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑10.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Push the release lever (B) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (A) out of theblade (C).

3. Push the new wiper bladesecurely on the wiper arm untilyou hear the release lever clickinto place.

To replace the rear wiper blade, liftthe rear wiper arm from the windowand pull the blade.

Vehicle Care 10-33

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle may have a visualoptical headlamp aiming system.The aim has been preset at thefactory and should need no furtheradjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected and adjustment may benecessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their highbeams at you, this may also meanthe vertical aim needs to beadjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicleis taken to your dealer for service ifthe headlamps need to be re-aimed.It is possible however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described.

The vehicle should be:. Placed so the headlamps are

7.6 m (25 ft) from a light coloredwall or other flat surface.

. On a level surface which is levelall the way to a wall.

. Placed so it is at a right angle tothe wall or other flat surface.

. Clear of any snow, ice, or mudon it.

. Fully assembled, the tiresproperly inflated, and all otherwork stopped while headlampaiming is being performed.

. Normally loaded with the sparetire in its original location and afull tank of fuel and one personor 75 kg (160 lbs) sitting on thedriver seat.

To adjust the vertical aim:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

2. Record the distance from theground to the aim dot on theheadlamp.

10-34 Vehicle Care

3. At a wall, measure from theground upward the recordeddistance from Step 2 andmark it.

4. Draw or tape a horizontal linethe width of the vehicle at thewall where it was marked itStep 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

5. Turn on the headlamps andplace a piece of cardboardor equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being aimed. Thisshould allow only the beam oflight from the headlamp beingaimed to be seen on the wall.

Passenger Side Shown

6. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly.

The adjustment screw can beturned with an E8 Torx® socketor T15 Torx® screwdriver.

7. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam isaimed to the horizontal tapeline. Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise orlower the beam.

The top edge of the cut-offshould be positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line.

8. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for theopposite headlamp.

Vehicle Care 10-35

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑37.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

HeadlampsTo replace a headlamp bulb:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5 for more information.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assemblyand pull it straight out.

3. Unplug the electrical connectorby pushing the release tab andpulling the bulb socket out.

4. Replace with a new bulb socket.

5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 toreinstall.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps (H3)

A. Stoplamp, Taillamp and TurnSignal Lamp

B. Back-up Lamp

10-36 Vehicle Care

To replace one of these bulbs in thetaillamp assembly:

1. Open the swing-gate. SeeTailgate on page 2‑7.

Passenger Side Shown

2. Remove the two screws from thetaillamp assembly.

3. Pull the taillamp assembly awayfrom the vehicle.

4. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

5. Pull the old bulb to release itfrom the socket.


Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps (H3T)

A. Stoplamp and Taillamp

B. Turn Signal Lamp

C. Back-up Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs in thetaillamp assembly:

1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgateon page 2‑7 .

2. Remove the two screws from thetaillamp assembly.

3. Pull the taillamp assembly awayfrom the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-37

4. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

5. Pull the old bulb to release itfrom the socket.

6. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto reinstall in the taillampassembly.

7. Reinstall the taillamp assemblymaking sure to line up the pinswith the vehicle.

8. Reinstall the two screws.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holdingthe license plate lamp.

2. Pull the license plate lamp awayfrom the fascia.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the licenseplate lamp assembly.

4. Install the new bulb into thesocket.


Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-upLamp (H3T)

W16W

Back-up (H3),Stoplamp,Taillamp and TurnSignal Lamp

3157K

License Plate Lamp 194

Low-Beam andHigh-BeamHeadlamp

H13

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

10-38 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chance ofcircuit overload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and other

Power Accessories

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Havethe headlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice, maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Power and Heated Seat CircuitBreakers

There is a circuit breaker locatedunderneath the driver side front seatthat controls the power and heatedseat functions.

Vehicle Care 10-39

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from short circuits bya combination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on theroad and do not have a spare fuse,you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you canget along without— like the radioor cigarette lighter— and use itsfuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

The engine compartment fuseblock is located on the driver sideof the engine compartment. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

To remove the cover, push in on thetabs at the ends of the cover andlift. To reinstall the cover, line up thetabs and push down on the coveruntil the tabs clicks into place.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical components on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

10-40 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Care 10-41

Fuse Usage

1 Heated Seats

2 Grille Guard

3Stop Lamp(H3T Only)

4 Roof Rack Lamps

5Battery IgnitionSwitch

6 Front Wiper

7Regulated VoltageControl Power

8 Power Locks

9 Sunroof, FrontWasher Pump

10 Accessories (SPO)

11 Not Used

12Transfer CaseControl Module

13 Radio

14Body ControlModule

Fuse Usage

15 Rear Wiper Motor(H3 Only)

16Rear Wiper PumpSwitch (H3 Only)

17

Air Injection Reactor(AIR) Pump Relay/TransmissionControl Module(TCM) (V8 Only)

18 Rear Vision Camera

19 Cluster

20 Rear Turn Lamp,Hazard Lamp

21Powertrain ControlModule 1

22Mass Air FlowSensor, CanisterVent Purge Solenoid

23 Injector/V8 Coil

24 Fog Lamp

25Powertrain ControlModule B

Fuse Usage

26TransmissionControlModule (TCM)

27 Airbags

28 Not Used

29Antilock BrakeSystem, StabiliTrak®

30Rear WindowDefogger

31 Canister Vent

32Regulated VoltageControl Sensor

33 Ignition 1

34 Transmission

35Cruise Control,Miscellaneous

36 Horn

37Driver Side RearPark Lamp

38 Amplifier

10-42 Vehicle Care

Fuse Usage

39 Daytime RunningLamps

40Passenger SideHeadlamp

41Driver SideHeadlamp

42TrailerBack-Up Lamp

43 Front Park Lamps

44Air Injection Reactor(AIR) Solenoid

45 Auxiliary Power 2/Cigarette Lighter

46Electronic ThrottleControl

47 Oxygen Sensor

48Air ConditioningClutch

49 Rear Park Lamp

50 Stop Lamp

Fuse Usage

51 Auxiliary Power 1/Cigarette Lighter

52StabiliTrak®,Antilock BrakeSystem

53Power Heated Seat,Belt Switch

54Fuel System ControlModule (FSCM)

55Trailer ParkingLamps

56Front Turn Signal,Hazard Signal,Courtesy Mirror

57 Power Sunroof

58Transfer CaseControl ModuleSwitch

59Climate ControlsControl Head

60 Back‐Up Lamp

61 Power Seats

Fuse Usage

62 Air Injection Reactor(AIR) Pump

63Passenger SidePower Window

64

Antilock BrakeSystem,StabiliTrak® 2Solenoid

67Antilock BrakeSystem,StabiliTrak® 1 Motor

68 Driver Side PowerWindow

82 Climate Control Fan

83Electronic BrakeController

84 Trailer B+ Fuse

85 Starter

91 Generator Megafuse

Vehicle Care 10-43

Relay Usage

66 Stop Lamp(H3T Only)

69 Fog Lamp

70High, Low BeamHeadlamps

71 Rear Defogger

72Windshield WiperOn/Off

73Windshield WiperHigh/Low

74 Horn

Relay Usage

75 Headlamp

76Air ConditioningClutch

77Powertrain ControlModule (Starter)

78 Run, Crank

79Daytime RunningLamps

80Air Injection Reactor(AIR) Solenoid

81 Powertrain

Relay Usage

86 Back-up

87Ignition 3 (Heating,Ventilation, AirConditioning)

88Retained AccessoryPower/Accessory

89 Park Lamp

Diode Usage

65 Wiper Diode

90Air ConditioningClutch Diode

10-44 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer tothe tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

. Overloading your tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Youcould have an air-out and aserious accident. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑27.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when yourtires are cold. See TirePressure on page 10‑51.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, puncturedor broken by a suddenimpact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn, old tires can causeaccidents. If your tread isbadly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged,replace them.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tireis molded into the sidewall.The following illustrations areexamples of a typical P‐Metricand a LT‐Metric tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizecode is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

Vehicle Care 10-45

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN).

The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are requiredto grade tires based onthree performance factors:treadwear, traction, andtemperature resistance.For more information, seeUniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 10‑61.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load.

For information onrecommended tire pressuresee Tire Pressure on page 10‑51and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑27.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizecode is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

10-46 Vehicle Care

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load:Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to supportthat load when used in adual configuration. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑51 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑27.

(D) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that the

tire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation MotorVehicle Safety Standards.

(E) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). TheTIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and datethe tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the date ofmanufacture.

(F) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(G) Single Tire MaximumLoad: Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used as a single. Forinformation on recommended

tire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑51 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑27.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following examples showthe different parts of a tire size.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

Vehicle Care 10-47

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is75 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code:A letter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carry capacity a tire iscertified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire

(A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric)Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizingsystem. The letters LT as thefirst two characters in the tiresize means a light truck tireengineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shownin item C of the light truck(LT‐Metric) tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as highas it is wide.

(D) Construction Code:A letter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

10-48 Vehicle Care

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Load Range: Load Range.

(G) Service Description: Theservice description indicates theload index and speed rating of atire. If two numbers are given asin the example, 120/116, thenthis represents the load index forsingle versus dual wheel usage(single/dual). The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amountof air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thismeans the combined weightof optional accessories.Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows,power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑51.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

Vehicle Care 10-49

DOT Markings: A codemolded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire isin compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑27.

GAWR FRT: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑27.

GAWR RR: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the rear axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑27.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:A tire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑27.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

10-50 Vehicle Care

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑51 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑27.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 inch) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑58.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire. SeeUniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 10‑61.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑27.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Care 10-51

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle'scapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑27.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under‐inflation orover‐inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under‐inflation),you can get the following:. Too much flexing. Too much heat. Tire overloading

. Premature orirregular wear

. Poor handling

. Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air(over‐inflation), you can getthe following:. Unusual wear. Poor handling. Rough ride. Needless damage fromroad hazards

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle. Thislabel shows your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount of

air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑27.How you load your vehicleaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Also check the tirepressure of the spare tire. If yourvehicle has a compact sparetire, it should be at 60 psi(420 kPa). See Full-Size SpareTire on page 10‑85 for additionalinformation.

10-52 Vehicle Care

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are underinflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your vehicle'stires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in thevehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Vehicle Care 10-53

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system maynot be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur fora variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑53 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and RSS-210/211 of IndustryCanada.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly on the vehicle, excludingthe spare tire. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in thevehicle's tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressurecondition is detected, the TPMSilluminates the low tire pressurewarning light located on theinstrument panel cluster.

10-54 Vehicle Care

If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible andinflate the tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑27.

At the same time, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) messageis displayed on the DIC displayscreen. The low tire pressurewarning light and the DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the tires are inflated tothe correct inflation pressure. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Tire Messages onpage 5‑25.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to the vehicle, showsthe size of the vehicle's originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the vehicle'stires when they are cold. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑27,for an example of the Tire andLoading Information label and itslocation on the vehicle. Also seeTire Pressure on page 10‑51.

The vehicle's TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑57, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑57 and Tires onpage 10‑44.

Notice: Liquid tire sealants coulddamage the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors. Sensordamage caused by using a tiresealant is not covered by yourwarranty. Do not use liquid tiresealants.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The low tire warninglight and DIC warning messagecome on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not havea TPMS sensor. The TPMSmalfunction light and DICmessage should go off once youre‐install the road tire containingthe TPMS sensor.

Vehicle Care 10-55

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle's tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction lightshould go off once the TPMSsensor matching process isperformed successfully. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged. TheDIC message and the TPMSmalfunction light should gooff when the TPMS sensorsare installed and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the vehicle's originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for the vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑59.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer/retailerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any time youreplace one or more of the TPMSsensors or rotate the vehicle's tires,the identification codes need tobe matched to the new tire/wheelposition. The sensors are matchedto the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side reartire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer/retailer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire's air pressure. If increasing thetire's air pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire's sidewall.To let air-pressure out of a tire youcan use the pointed end of the valvecap, a pencil-style air pressuregauge, or a key.

10-56 Vehicle Care

You have one minute to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall, to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger than one minute, to matchthe first tire and wheel, or more thanfive minutes to match all four tireand wheel positions, the matchingprocess stops and you need tostart over.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocedure is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch toON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Turn the exterior lamp switchfrom AUTO to OFF four timeswithin three seconds.A double horn chirp willsound and the TPMS low tirewarning light starts flashing.The double horn chirp andflashing TPMS warning lightindicates the TPMS matchingprocess has started. The TPMS

warning light should continueflashing throughout the matchingprocedure. The LOW TIREmessage displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Remove the valve cap from thevalve cap stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire's air pressurefor 10 seconds, then stop andlisten for a single horn chirp. Thesingle horn chirp should soundwithin 15 seconds, confirmingthat the sensor identificationcode has been matched to thistire and wheel position. If youdo not hear the confirmingsingle horn chirp, turn theignition switch to LOCK and startover beginning with Step 2.

6. Proceed to the passengerside front tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5.

9. After hearing the confirming hornchirp for the driver side rear tire,check to see if the TPMS low tirewarning light and the DIC LOWTIRE messages have turned off.If yes, the TPMS sensors havebeen relearned. Turn the ignitionswitch to LOCK/OFF.

If the low tire warning light andthe SERV TPM message on theDIC are on after completingStep 5 for the driver side reartire, the sensor relearn processhas not been successful. Turnthe ignition switch to LOCK/OFFand repeat the matching processbeginning with Step 2.

Vehicle Care 10-57

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect your vehicle'stires, including the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, forsigns of wear or damage. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tires onpage 10‑58 for more information.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to13 000 km). See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.The first rotation is the mostimportant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑58 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑63.

Make sure the spare tire isstored securely. Push, pull andthen try to rotate or turn the tire.If it moves, use the wheelwrench/hoist shaft to tighten thecable. See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑64.

When rotating the vehicle's tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here. Do notinclude the spare tire in the tirerotation.

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑51 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑27.

10-58 Vehicle Care

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑53.

Make certain that all wheel nutsare properly tightened. See“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑64.

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, and roadconditions influence when you neednew tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) orless of tread remaining.

The vehicle needs new tires if anyof the following statements are true:. You can see the indicators at

three or more places aroundthe tire.

. You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall is cracked,cut, or snagged deep enough toshow cord or fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannot berepaired well because of the sizeor location of the damage.

Vehicle Care 10-59

The rubber in tires degrades overtime. This is also true for the sparetire, if the vehicle has one, evenif it is not being used. Multipleconditions affect how fast thisaging takes place, includingtemperatures, loading conditions,and inflation pressure maintenance.With proper care and maintenancetires typically wear out before theydegrade due to age. If you areunsure about the need to replacethe tires as they get older, consultthe tire manufacturer for moreinformation.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle.The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, whenit was new, were designed to

meet General Motors TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification (TPC spec)system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tireswith the same TPC Spec rating.This way, your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that aredesigned to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as theoriginal tires.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over adozen critical specifications thatimpact the overall performanceof your vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride andhandling, traction control, and

tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC spec numberwill be followed by a MS, formud and snow. See TireSidewall Labeling on page 10‑44for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tireswill help keep your vehicleperforming most like it did whenthe tires were new. Replacingless than a full set of tires canaffect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle.

10-60 Vehicle Care

See Tire Inspection on page 10‑57and Tire Rotation on page10‑57for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types(radial and bias-belted tires)the vehicle may not handleproperly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on your vehicle'swheels.

{ WARNING

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace yourvehicle's tires with those that donot have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radialand bias‐belted tires) as yourvehicle's original tires.

Vehicles equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system maygive an inaccurate low‐pressurewarning if non‐TPC spec ratedtires are installed on yourvehicle. Non‐TPC Spec rated

tires may give a low‐pressurewarning that is higher or lowerthan the proper warning levelyou would get with TPC Specrated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System onpage 10‑52.

Your vehicle's originalequipment tires are listedon the Tire and LoadingInformation Label. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑27, formore information about the Tireand Loading Information Labeland its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that area different size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.

Vehicle Care 10-61

Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as anti‐lockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{ WARNING

If you add different sizedwheels, your vehicle may notprovide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only useHummer specific wheel and tiresystems developed for yourvehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a GM certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑59 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewallsof most passenger car tires.The Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) systemdoes not apply to deeptread, winter-type snow tires,

space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onHummer light trucks may varywith respect to these grades,they must also conform tofederal safety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlledconditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.

10-62 Vehicle Care

For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and a half (1½)times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.The relative performance oftires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however,and may depart significantlyfrom the norm due to variationsin driving habits, servicepractices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is basedon straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels on the vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if thereis unusual tire wear or the vehiclepulls to one side or the other, thealignment should be checked.

Vehicle Care 10-63

If the vehicle vibrates whendriving on a smooth road, the tiresand wheels might need to berebalanced. See your dealer forproper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it(except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors forthe vehicle.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑64 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause acrash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

10-64 Vehicle Care

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

If your vehicle has LT285/75R16or P265/65R18 size tires, do notuse tire chains. They can damageyour vehicle because there is notenough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause you tolose control of your vehicle andyou or others may be injured in acrash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on yourvehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjust,or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and donot spin your vehicle's wheels.

If you do find traction devices thatwill fit, install them on the reartires.

Notice: If your vehicle has a tiresize other than LT285/75R16 orP265/65R18 use tire chains onlywhere legal and only when youmust. Use chains that are theproper size for your tires. Installthem on the tires of the rear axle.Do not use chains on the tires ofthe front axle. Tighten them astightly as possible with theends securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chainmanufacturer's instructions.

If you can hear the chainscontacting your vehicle, stopand retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until itstops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chainson will damage your vehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

Vehicle Care 10-65

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but youcan still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road if possible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid furthertire and wheel damage by drivingslowly to a level place. Turn onyour hazard warning flashers.See Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑5 .

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallon you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured oreven killed. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help preventthe vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever inP (Park).

3. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle,be sure the transfer caseis in a drive gear – not inN (Neutral).

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be even more certain thevehicle will not move, put blocksat the front and rear of the tirefarthest away from the one beingchanged. That would be the tireon the other side, at the oppositeend of the vehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire, thewheel blocks need to be set upbefore changing it. The wheelblocks are located in the tool bag inthe swing-gate for H3 models orbelow the rear seat for H3T models.

10-66 Vehicle Care

See Tire Changing (H3T) onpage 10‑66 or Tire Changing (H3)on page 10‑75 for more information.

To use the wheel blocks, lift thewheel block and lock it into place.

Use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (A) when thevehicle has a flat tire (B).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.

Tire Changing (H3T)

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

To access the jack and tools locatedunder the rear seat:

1. Turn the wing nut (A)counterclockwise to release thejack and tools.

2. Remove the jack and tool kitfrom the bracket.

3. Release the straps (B) thatsecure the tool bag to the jack.

Vehicle Care 10-67

The following tools are used toremove the spare tire and flat tire.

A. Wheel Wrench

B. Jack Handle Extensions

C. Jack Handle

D. Jack

E. Wheel Blocks

To access the spare tire:

A. Spare Tire/Flat Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

B. Tire/Wheel Retainer

C. Hoist Cable

D. Hoist Assembly

E. Hoist Shaft

F. Jack Handle Extension(s)

G. Wheel Wrench

H. Hoist Shaft Access Ramp

I. Hoist End of the Extension Tool

1. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (F) and wheelwrench (G).

10-68 Vehicle Care

2. Insert the hoist end of theextension tool (I) through thehoist shaft access ramp (H).

3. The hoist end of the extensiontool (I) must connect to the hoistshaft (E). The hoist end of theextension tool is used to lowerthe spare tire.

Do not use the chiseled end ofthe wheel wrench.

4. Turn the wheel wrench (G)counterclockwise to lower thespare tire (A) to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench (G) until the spare tire (A)can be pulled from under thevehicle.

If the spare tire does not lower tothe ground, the secondary latchis engaged. See SecondaryLatch System on page 10‑84.

5. Pull the spare tire towards you.

6. Tilt the tire, with slack in thecable, to access the tire/wheelretainer (B).

Vehicle Care 10-69

7. Separate the retainer from theguide pin by sliding the retainerup the pin while pressing downon the latch. When the retaineris separated from the guide pin,tilt the retainer and pull it throughthe center of the wheel alongwith the cable and guide pin.

8. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑64 for moreinformation.

2. Remove the center cap byplacing the flat end of the wheelwrench in the slot on the wheeland gently pry the centercap out.

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen thewheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.

If the vehicle has locking lugnuts, the key is supplied in thetool bag. Use the key along withthe wheel wrench to remove thewheel nuts from the tire.

Now jack up the vehicle.

10-70 Vehicle Care

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

A. Front Position - LowerControl Arm

B. Rear Position - Lower Axle

4. Locate the vehicle's jackingpositions (A and B).

5. Assemble the jack and tools asfollows:

Front Position

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tireis on a front tire of the vehicle,use the jack handle and bothjack handle extensions. Attachthe wheel wrench to the jackhandle extensions. Attachthe jack handle to the jack.

From the front of the vehicleposition the jack on the frontlower control arm along the barthat runs front to back. Turn thewheel wrench clockwise to raisethe vehicle. Raise the vehicle farenough off the ground so thereis enough room for the spare tireto clear the ground.

Rear Positions

Refer to the graphic above tolocate the placement of the jackif the flat tire is on the rear of thevehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-71

Rear Tire Flat: Use the jackhandle and both jack handleextensions. Attach the wheelwrench to the jack extensions.Attach the jack handle to thejack. From the rear of the vehiclealign the jack under the rearaxle. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to clearthe ground.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the jack headto the lifting point.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

7. Remove all the wheel nuts andtake off the flat tire.

{ WARNING


8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

10-72 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9. Put the spare tire on themounting surface.

10. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel aftermounting the spare.

11. Tighten each wheel nut byhand. Then use the wheelwrench to tighten the nuts untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

12. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lowerthe vehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

13. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shownby turning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

14. After installing the wheel andtire, reinstall the center cap.Place the cap on the wheel andtap it into place until it sits flushwith the wheel.

Vehicle Care 10-73

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

A. Spare Tire/Flat Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

B. Tire/Wheel Retainer

C. Hoist Cable

D. Hoist Assembly

E. Hoist Shaft

F. Jack Handle Extension(s)

G. Wheel Wrench

H. Hoist Shaft Access Ramp

I. Hoist End of the Extension Tool

To store the flat or spare tire on thespare tire mount:

1. Place the flat or spare tire (A) onthe ground at the rear of thevehicle with the valve stempointed down and to the rear.

10-74 Vehicle Care

2. Tilt the tire. Separate thetire/wheel retainer (B) from theguide pin. Pull the pin throughthe center of the wheel. Tilt thetire/wheel retainer (B) downthrough the center wheelopening.

3. Make sure the tire/wheelretainer (B) is fully seated acrossthe underside of the wheel.

4. Assembly the two jack handleextensions (F) and wheelwrench (G).

5. Insert the hoist end of theextension tool (I) through thehoist shaft access ramp (H).

6. Raise the tire part upward. Makesure the tire/wheel retainer (B) isseated in the wheel opening.

7. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten thecable.

Vehicle Care 10-75

8. Push, pull (A) and then try toturn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,use the wheel wrench to tightenthe cable.

To store the jack tool bag and jack:

1. Return the tools to the jacktool bag.

2. Secure the tool bag to the jackby securely wrapping the strapsaround the jack. Then, slide thestraps through the rings on thebag and secure.

3. Reinstall the wing nut retainerto fasten the jack and tool bagunder the rear seat.

Make sure that the wing nutpasses through the tool bag andthe jack before tightening it.

4. Turn the wing nut retainerclockwise to secure.

Tire Changing (H3)

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment needed is located inthe swing-gate, behind a cover. Toremove the equipment:

1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgateon page 2‑7 .

2. Lift the two latches, located onthe inside of the tailgate, toremove the cover.

10-76 Vehicle Care

3. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise to release thejack tool bag and jack andremove them.

4. Release the straps that securethe jack tool bag to the jack.

5. Open the tool bag to find thefollowing tools, which are usedto remove the spare tire andflat tire:

A. Wheel Wrench

B. Jack Handle Extensions

C. Jack Handle

D. Jack

E. Wheel Blocks

The spare tire is attached to theoutside of the tailgate. To removethe spare tire:

1. If the vehicle has a spare tirecover release the latch by pullingthe latch straight back andturning it away from the cover atthe same time.

Notice: Opening the endgatebefore completely closing andlatching the spare tire cover mayresult in damage to your vehicle.Close and latch the spare tirecover before opening the endgateto avoid possible damage.

Vehicle Care 10-77

2. Remove the center cap,if equipped, by placing the flatend of the wheel wrench in theslot on the wheel and gently prythe center cap out.

3. Use the wheel wrench to removethe wheel nuts securing thespare tire.


4. You may need assistance toremove the spare tire. Pull offand gently lower the spare tire tothe ground. Set it next to theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑64 for moreinformation.

2. Remove the center cap byplacing the flat end of the wheelwrench in the slot on the wheeland gently pry the centercap out.

10-78 Vehicle Care

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen thewheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.


Now jack up the vehicle.

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

A. Front Position - LowerControl Arm

B. Rear Position - Lower Axle

4. Locate the vehicle's jackingpositions (A and B).

5. Assemble the jack and tools asfollows:

Front Position

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a front tire of the vehicle, usethe jack handle and both jackhandle extensions. Attach thewheel wrench to the jack handleextensions. Attach the jackhandle to the jack. From thefront of the vehicle position thejack on the front lower controlarm along the bar that runs frontto back. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.

Vehicle Care 10-79

Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to clearthe ground.

Rear Positions

Refer to the graphic above tolocate the placement of the jackif the flat tire is on the rear of thevehicle.

Rear Tire Flat: Use the jackhandle and both jack handleextensions. Attach the wheelwrench to the jack extensions.Attach the jack handle to thejack. From the rear of the vehiclealign the jack under the rearaxle. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to clearthe ground.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the jackhead to the lifting point.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when itis jacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

10-80 Vehicle Care

7. Remove all the wheel nuts andtake off the flat tire.

{ WARNING


8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

9. Put the spare tire on themounting surface.

10. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel aftermounting the spare.

11. Tighten each wheel nut byhand. Then use the wheelwrench to tighten the nuts untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

12. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lowerthe vehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

Vehicle Care 10-81

{ WARNING


Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

13. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shownby turning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

14. After installing the wheel andtire, reinstall the center cap.Place the cap on the wheel andtap it into place until it sits flushwith the wheel.

10-82 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the flat or spare tire on thespare tire mount:

1. Slide the flat or spare tire ontothe swing-gate.

You may need assistance todo this.

2. Reinstall the nuts to retain theflat or spare tire.

3. Tighten the nuts by hand.

{ WARNING


4. Use the wheel wrench to tightenthe nuts firmly. Try to move thetire back and forth slightly to besure it is secure.

5. Reinstall the center tire coveronto the spare or flat tire.

6. If the vehicle has a spare tirecover close the cover and latchthe side latch.

Vehicle Care 10-83

To store the jack tool bag and jack:

1. Return the tools to the jacktool bag.

2. Secure the tool bag to the jackby securely wrapping the strapsaround the jack. Then, slide thestraps through the rings on thebag and secure.

3. Position the jack and jack toolbag in the swing-gate.

When reinstalling the jack andjack tool bag, make sure the jackbase is securely seated behindthe tabs in the swing-gate.

4. Reinstall the wing nut retainer tofasten the jack and tool bag inthe storage compartment.

Make sure that the wing nutpasses through the tool bag andthe jack before tightening it.

5. Turn the wing nut retainerclockwise to secure.

6. Reinstall the compartment coverby inserting the locator tabs inthe holes in the swing-gate.Push the latches down tosecure.

10-84 Vehicle Care

Secondary Latch SystemThis vehicle has an underbodymounted tire hoist assembly thathas a secondary latch system. It isdesigned to stop the spare tire fromsuddenly falling off the vehicle ifthe cable holding the spare tire isdamaged. For the secondary latchto work, the tire must be stowedwith the valve stem pointing down.See Tire Changing (H3T) onpage 10‑66 or Tire Changing (H3)on page 10‑75 for instructions onstoring the spare tire correctly.

{ WARNING

Before beginning this procedureread all the instructions. Failure toread and follow the instructionscould damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could gethurt. Read and follow theinstructions listed next.

To release the spare tire from thesecondary latch:

{ WARNING

Someone standing too closeduring the procedure could beinjured by the jack. If the sparetire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one isbehind you or on either side ofyou as you pull the jack out fromunder the spare.

1. If the cable is not visible, startthis procedure at Step 3.

2. Turn the lug wrenchcounterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches (15 cm)of cable is exposed.

3. Attach the lug wrench to thejack and raise the jack at least10 turns.

4. Place the jack under the vehicle,ahead of the rear bumper.Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of thespare tire.

Vehicle Care 10-85

5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise toraise the jack until it lifts thesecondary latch spring.

6. Keep raising the jack until thespare tire stops moving upwardand is held firmly in place. Thislets you know that the secondarylatch has released and the sparetire is balancing on the jack.

7. Lower the jack by turning the lugwrench counterclockwise. Keeplowering the jack until the sparetire slides off the jack.

8. Disconnect the lug wrench fromthe jack and carefully removethe jack. Use one hand to pushagainst the spare tire whilefirmly pulling the jack out fromunder the spare tire with theother hand.

9. Tilt the retainer and slip itthrough the wheel openingwhen the spare tire has beencompletely lowered.

10. Turn the lug wrench clockwiseto raise the cable back up if thecable is hanging.

Have the hoist shaft assemblyinspected as soon as you can. Youwill not be able to store a spare tireusing the hoist assembly until it hasbeen repaired or replaced.

Full-Size Spare TireThe vehicle, when new, had afully-inflated spare tire. A spare tiremay lose air over time, so check itsinflation pressure regularly. See TirePressure on page 10‑51 and VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑27 forinformation regarding proper tireinflation and loading your vehicle.For instruction on how to remove,install or store a spare tire, see TireChanging (H3T) on page 10‑66 orTire Changing (H3) on page 10‑75.

10-86 Vehicle Care

After installing the spare tire on yourvehicle, you should stop as soon aspossible and make sure the spare iscorrectly inflated.

The spare tire does not have a TirePressure Monitor System sensor.You may get a low pressure warninglight. See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑53. Have thedamaged or flat road tire repaired orreplaced as soon as you can.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they willnot fit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together.

Jump StartingIf the vehicle's battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12‐volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle'ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If theyare, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want.

Vehicle Care 10-87

You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.If you have a four-wheel-drivevehicle, be sure the transfercase is not in Neutral.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessorieswhen jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thebatteries on both vehicles. Youwill use the positive (+) batteryterminal and the remotenegative (−) jump startingterminal to jump start yourvehicle. To access thepositive (+) battery terminal,open the terminal cover. SeeEngine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for moreinformation on the terminallocations.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the batteries haveenough water. You do not needto add water to the ACDelco®

battery (or batteries) installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

10-88 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part,or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away fromthe dead battery, but not nearengine parts that move. Theelectrical connection is just asgood there, and the chance ofsparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) terminal, markedGND (Ground), for this purpose.

Vehicle Care 10-89

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle thathad the dead battery. If it willnot start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each otheror other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) batteryterminal cover to its originalposition.

10-90 Vehicle Care

Towing

Towing the VehicleTo avoid damage, the disabledvehicle should be towed with allfour wheels off the ground. Consultyour dealer or a professional towingservice if the disabled vehicle mustbe towed. See Roadside Service onpage 13‑5.

To tow the vehicle behindanother vehicle for recreationalpurposes— such as behind amotorhome, see “RecreationalVehicle Towing” following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towingmeans towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle – such as behinda motorhome. The two mostcommon types of recreationalvehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” — towing the vehicle withall four wheels on the ground, and

“dolly towing” — towing the vehiclewith two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device knownas a “dolly”.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the tow vehicle? Be sure to readthe tow vehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

This full‐time four‐wheel‐drivevehicle can be dinghy towed fromthe front. These vehicles can alsobe towed by placing them on aplatform trailer with all four wheelsoff the ground. These vehiclescannot be towed using a dolly.

Vehicle Care 10-91

Use the following procedure to towthe vehicle:

1. Put the transmission in P (Park)for an automatic transmissionor in 1 (First) for a manualtransmission.

2. Turn the engine off, butleave the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.

4. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.

{ WARNING

Shifting a full‐time four‐wheel‐drive vehicle's transfer case intoN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the automatictransmission is in P (Park) or themanual transmission is in anygear. You or others could beinjured. Make sure the parkingbrake is firmly set before thetransfer case is shifted toN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See Four-WheelDrive on page 9‑46 for theproper procedure to select theN (Neutral) position for thevehicle.

6. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towedis firmly attached to the towvehicle.

7. Make sure the ignition is inACC/ACCESSORY.

When towing the vehicle forextended periods of time, start thevehicle as often as possible toprevent battery drain. This shouldonly be done when the tow vehicleis parked.

After towing, see “Shifting Out ofNEUTRAL” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 9‑46.

Dolly Towing

Notice: Dolly towing thevehicle will damage drivetraincomponents. Do not dolly tow thevehicle.

The vehicle cannot be dolly towed.If the vehicle must be towed behindanother vehicle, use the dinghytowing procedure explainedpreviously.

10-92 Vehicle Care

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To keepthe paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water or usechrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Vehicle Care 10-93

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,keep it clean by washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight and use a carwashing soap.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal or plasticon the vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correct productusage, necessary safety

precautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

High pressure car washes couldcause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 inches) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Notice: Conveyor systems onsome automatic car washes coulddamage the vehicle. There maynot be enough clearance for theundercarriage. Check with the carwash manager before using theautomatic car wash.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may berequired. See “Fluids andLubricants” in the Index of the“Maintenance and Warranty andOwner assistance Information”manual.

10-94 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

The vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a softclean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a softclean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calciumor sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roadsfor conditions such as ice anddust. Always wash the vehicle'schrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chromepolish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Vehicle Care 10-95

Windshield, Backglass, andWiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldand backglass with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's/retailer'sbody and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

10-96 Vehicle Care

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody withplain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing systemcan do this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareThe vehicle's interior will continueto look its best if it is cleaned often.Dust and dirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage tothe carpet, fabric, leather, andplastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that cantransfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to thevehicle's interior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer has products forcleaning the vehicle's interior. Whencleaning the vehicle's interior, onlyuse cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces that are beingcleaned. Permanent damage can

result from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Apply the cleaner directlyto the cleaning cloth to preventover-spray. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in thevehicle's interior. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle's interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle's doors andwindows.

Vehicle Care 10-97

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to the vehicle'sinterior surfaces.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Damage to the vehicle's interiormay result from the use of manyorganic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith a beater bar in the nozzle mayonly be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first withplain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

10-98 Vehicle Care

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.

Leather

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat, steam,or spot lifters or spot removers,or shoe polish on leather. Manycommercial leather cleanersand coatings that are sold topreserve and protect leathermay permanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Donot use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containingorganic solvents to clean thevehicle's interior because they canalter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect soft plastic surfacesmay permanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Donot use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containingorganic solvents to clean thevehicle's interior because they canalter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-11

General InformationNotice: Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section. Werecommend having your dealer/retailer perform these services.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer/retailer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑27.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

11-2 Service and Maintenance

. Are driven off-road in therecommended manner. SeeOff-Road Driving on page 9‑7.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑64.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician dothe work. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

At your dealer/retailer, you can becertain that you will receive thehighest level of service available.

Your dealer/retailer has speciallytrained service technicians, usesgenuine replacement parts, aswell as, up to date tools andequipment to ensure fast andaccurate diagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to useare listed in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑8 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑10. We recommend theuse of genuine parts from yourdealer/retailer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performedwhen they have 8 000 to 13 000 km(5,000 to 8,000 miles). See TireRotation on page 10‑57.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Oil MessageDisplays

Change engine oil and filter. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9. AnEmission Control Service.

When the “Change Oil” messagedisplays, service is required forthe vehicle as soon as possible,within the next 1 000 km/600 miles.If driving under the best conditions,the engine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engineoil and filter must be changed atleast once a year and the oil lifesystem must be reset. Your dealerhas trained service technicians whowill perform this work and reset thesystem. If the engine oil life systemis reset accidentally, service thevehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 milessince the last service. Reset the oil


life system whenever the oil ischanged. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10‑11.

When the “Change Oil” messagedisplays, certain services, checks,and inspections are required.The services described forMaintenance I should be performedat every engine oil change. Theservices described for MaintenanceII should be performed when:. Maintenance I was performed

the last time the engine oil waschanged.

. It has been 10 months or moresince the “Change Oil” messagehas displayed or since the lastservice.

Maintenance I. Change engine oil and filter.

See Engine Oil on page 10‑9.An Emission Control Service.

. Engine coolant level check. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑19.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑25.

. Tire inflation check. See TirePressure on page 10‑51.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑57.

. Rotate tires. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑57.

. Fluids visual leak check(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired andthe fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection (vehicles driven industy conditions only). SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑17.

. Brake system inspection(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

Maintenance II. Perform all services described in

Maintenance I.. Steering and suspension

inspection. Visual inspection fordamaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Lubricate the front suspension,steering linkage, and parkingbrake cable guides. Control armball joints require lubrication butshould not be lubricated unlesstheir temperature is −12°C(10°F) or higher, or they couldbe damaged.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspectionof hoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.


. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑92. Wornor damaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑32.

. Body hinges and latches, keylock cylinders, folding seathardware, and rear compartmenthinges, linkage, and handlepivot points lubrication. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8.More frequent lubrication maybe required when vehicleis exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑26.

. Automatic transmission fluidlevel check and adding fluid,if needed. See AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑12.

. Four‐wheel drive vehicles:Transfer case fluid level checkand adding fluid, if needed.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑17.

Additional Required Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑9.. Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 10‑19.. Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑25.

Once a Month. Tire inflation check. See Tire

Pressure on page 10‑51.. Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 10‑57.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑30.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control SystemCheck on page 10‑30.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑31.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑31.

. Engine cooling system andpressure cap pressure check.Radiator and air conditioningcondenser outside cleaning. SeeCooling System on page 10‑18.


. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 40 000 km/25,000Miles. Fuel system inspection for

damage or leaks.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑17.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service) forvehicles mainly driven in heavycity traffic in hot weather, inhilly or mountainous terrain,when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑12.

. Four‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change. Check venthose at transfer case for kinksand proper installation. Checkto be sure vent hose isunobstructed, clear, and free ofdebris. During any maintenance,if a power washer is used toclean mud and dirt from theunderbody, care should be takento not directly spray the transfercase output seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service).See Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑12.

. Rear axle fluid change (normalservice). See Rear Axle onpage 10‑29.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wires inspection.An Emission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill, cooling systemand cap pressure check, andcleaning of outside of radiatorand air conditioning condenser(or every 5 years, whicheveroccurs first). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑18. AnEmission Control Service.

. Engine accessory drive beltinspection for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damageand replacement, if needed.An Emission Control Service.


Service Maintenance IMaintenance

II

Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. • •

Engine coolant level check. • •

Windshield washer fluid level check. • •

Tire inflation pressures check. • •

Tire wear inspection. • •

Rotate tires. • •

Fluids visual leak check. • •

Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • •

Brake system inspection. • •

Body components lubrication. •

Steering and suspension inspection. •


Service Maintenance IMaintenance

II

Chassis components lubrication. •

Engine cooling system inspection. •

Windshield wiper blades inspection. •

Body components lubrication. •

Restraint system components check. •

Automatic transmission fluid level check. •

Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid level check. •

Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions). •


Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburstsymbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle's engine,see Engine Oil on page 10‑9.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑19

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,in Canada 89021320).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering SystemGM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,in Canada 89021807).

Hydraulic Clutch SystemHydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12345347, in Canada 10953517)or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.


Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Front and Rear AxleSAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678).

Transfer Case DEXRON®‐VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Hood HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Outer Endgate Handle Pivot PointsMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

Weatherstrip SqueaksSynthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).


Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

3.7L L5 and 5.3L V8 Engine 15942429 —

Engine Oil Filter

3.7L L5 Engine 19210285 PF61

5.3L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs

3.7L L5 Engine 12625058 41-103

5.3L V8 Engine 12621258 41-110

Wiper Blades

Front Driver Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in) 10389562 —

Front Passenger Side – 40.0 cm (15.7 in) 10389563 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in) 10389570 —


Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed


Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading


Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Model designation. Paint information. Production options and special

equipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.

12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric. Please refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑8 for more information.

Capacities and Specifications

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System

3.7L L5 Engine 9.5 L 10.0 qt

5.3L V8 Engine 13.5 L 14.3 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

3.7L L5 and 5.3L V8 Engines 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

H3 87.1 L 23.0 gal

H3T 102.2 L 27.0 gal

Technical Data 12-3

Capacities and Specifications (cont'd)

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Transfer Case 1.5 L 1.6 qt

Transmission

3.7L L5 and 5.3L V8, Automatic Transmission(Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)

4.7 L 5.0 qt

3.7L L5, Manual Transmission (Drain and Refill) 2.4 L 2.5 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.7L L5 EAutomaticManual

1.01 mm (0.040 in)

5.3LV8 P Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)

12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.7L L5 Engine

5.3L V8 Engine

Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-16Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toHUMMER. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service orparts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.

13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, call the HUMMERConsumer Relations Manager at1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376),Customer Assistance prompt.In Canada, call GM of CanadaCustomer Communication Centreat 1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer AssistanceRepresentative:. Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). This is available from thevehicle registration or title, orthe plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage

When contacting HUMMER, pleaseremember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggest youfollow Step One first if you have aconcern.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both HUMMER and your dealer arecommitted to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your newvehicle. However, if you continue toremain unsatisfied after followingthe procedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, you can file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto LineProgram to enforce any additionalrights you may have.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.


Contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone numberor write them at:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800- 955-5100dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesHUMMER encourages customersto call the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail HUMMER,refer to the addresses below.

United States – CustomerAssistance

HUMMER CustomerAssistance CenterP.O. Box 33177Detroit, MI 48232-5177www.HUMMER.com

1-866-HUMMER6 (1-866-486-6376)1-800-833-6537 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-866-HUMMER6 (1-866-486-6376)

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada – CustomerAssistance

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmcanada.com

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas – CustomerAssistance

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.


Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) – CustomerAssistance

General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), HUMMER has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY userin the U.S. can communicatewith HUMMER by dialing:1-800-833-6537. (TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmownercenter.com/hummer

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more. Online service and maintenance

records. Find HUMMER dealers for

service nationwide. Exclusive privileges and offers. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle. OnStar® and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries


Other Helpful Links:

HUMMER — www.hummer.com

HUMMER Merchandise —www.hummerstuff.com

Roadside ServiceFor U.S. purchased vehicles, call1‐866‐HUMMER6 (486‐6376); (TextTelephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian purchased vehicles,call 1‐800‐268‐6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.HUMMER and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

HUMMER and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.


Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service isprovided to unlock the vehicle ifyou are locked out. A remoteunlock may be available if youhave OnStar®. For securityreasons, the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest HUMMER dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven.

. Flat Tire Change: Service isprovided to change a flat tirewith spare tire. The spare tire,if equipped, must be in goodcondition and properly inflated.It is your responsibility for therepair or replacement of thetire if it is not covered by thewarranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service isprovided to jump start a deadbattery.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. Additionaltravel information is alsoavailable. Allow three weeksfor delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed duringthe 5 year/100,000 miles(160 000 km) Powertrainwarranty period. Itemsconsidered are hotel, meals,and rental car.

HUMMER Technician RoadsideService (U.S. only)

HUMMER's exceptional RoadsideService is more than an autoclub or towing service. It providesevery HUMMER owner in theUnited States with the advantage ofcontacting a HUMMER advisor and,where available, a HUMMER traineddealer technician who can provideon-site service.


A dealer technician will travel toyour location within a 30 mileradius of a participating HUMMERdealership. If beyond this radius, wewill arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest HUMMERdealership. Each technician travelswith a specially equipped servicevehicle complete with the necessaryHUMMER parts and tools requiredto handle most roadside repairs.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting or

changing of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Limit ofsix requests per year.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders arerequired. Once authorization hasbeen received, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will help youmake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

. Alternative Service:If assistance cannot beprovided right away, theRoadside Assistance advisormay give you permission to getlocal emergency road service.You will receive payment, up to$100, after sending the originalreceipt to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.


Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requireswarranty service, contact yourdealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a serviceappointment and advising yourservice consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealercan help minimize yourinconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please callyour dealership/retailer, let themknow this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper to Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada) andextended powertrain, and hybridspecific warranty in both the U.S.and Canada.

Several courtesy transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing your inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generallybe completed while you wait.However, if you are unable towait, HUMMER helps to minimizeyour inconvenience by providingseveral transportation options.Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of thefollowing:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideyou with shuttle service to get youto your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule.This includes one‐way or round tripshuttle service within reasonabletime and distance parameters of thedealer's area.


Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofthe dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only beup to the maximum amount allowedby HUMMER for shuttle service.In addition, for U.S. customers,should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warrantyrepair. Rental reimbursement willbe limited and must be supportedby original receipts. This requiresthat you sign and complete arental agreement and meetstate/provincial, local, and rentalvehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike-vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such asshuttle service, may not be availableat every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

HUMMER reserves the rightto unilaterally modify, change ordiscontinue Courtesy Transportationat any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.


Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged,have the damage repaired by aqualified technician using theproper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish yourvehicle's resale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine Collisionparts are your best choice toensure that your vehicle's designedappearance, durability and safetyare preserved. The use of Genuineparts can help maintain yourHUMMER New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total lossesin prior crashes. In most cases,the parts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment part,may be an acceptable choice tomaintain your vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance, however, the historyof these parts is not known. Suchparts are not covered by yourHUMMER New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any related failuresare not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than HUMMERand may not have been tested foryour vehicle. As a result, theseparts may fit poorly, exhibitpremature durability/corrosionproblems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions.

Aftermarket parts are not coveredby your HUMMER New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts are notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

HUMMER also recommends thatyou choose a collision repair facilitythat meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. YourHUMMER dealer may have acollision repair center with trainedtechnicians and state of theart equipment, or be able torecommend a collision repaircenter that has trained techniciansand comparable equipment.


Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment inyour HUMMER vehicle withcomprehensive and collisioninsurance coverage. There aresignificant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to yourHUMMER vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairsby using aftermarket collision parts.Some insurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you assure yourvehicle will be repaired with originalequipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not availablefrom your current insurance carrier,consider switching to anotherinsurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that assures repairswith Genuine Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Service on page 13‑5.

Gather the following information:. Driver's name, address, phone

number. Driver's license number. Owner's name, address, phone

number. Vehicle license plate. Vehicle make, model and

model year. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Insurance company and policy

number. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑33.


Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, HUMMERrecommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have apre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specifyto the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, eithernew Genuine parts or recycledoriginal parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by yourHUMMER vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill forthe repair, but you must livewith the repair. Depending onyour policy limits, your insurancecompany may initially value therepair using aftermarket parts.

Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on Genuineparts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated tohave the vehicle repaired withGenuine parts, even if yourinsurance coverage does not paythe full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as cost stays within reasonablelimits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on engines,transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering,body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably servicecars and trucks. Each bulletincontains instructions to assist in thediagnosis and service of yourvehicle.


Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The owner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past Model OrderForms

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model HUMMER vehicles.To request an order form, specifyyear and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. on the World Wide Webat: helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: Alllisted prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign.


However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in additionto notifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, please notify GeneralMotors.

Call 1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376),or write:

HUMMER CustomerAssistance CenterP.O. Box 33177Detroit , MI 48232-5177

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication CentreCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa , Ontario L1H 8P7


Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour HUMMER vehicle has anumber of sophisticated computersthat record information about thevehicle’s performance and how it isdriven. For example, your vehicleuses computer modules to monitorand control engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.


HUMMER will not access this dataor share it with others except: withthe consent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request of police orsimilar government office; as part ofHUMMER's defense of litigationthrough the discovery process; or,as required by law. Data thatHUMMER collects or receives mayalso be used for HUMMER researchneeds or may be made available toothers for research purposes, wherea need is shown and the data is nottied to a specific vehicle or vehicleowner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle has OnStar and yousubscribe to the OnStar services,please refer to the OnStar Termsand Conditions in the OnStarOwners Guide for information ondata collection and use.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data andfor deletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inHUMMER vehicles does not use orrecord personal information or linkwith any other HUMMER systemcontaining personal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with RSS-210/211 ofIndustry Canada.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-40

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-17Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-33

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-29AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40

Passenger Status Indicator . . . 5-11Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10

Audio SystemFixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-10Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-41Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Shiftlock Control SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

AxleLocking Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-32Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-33Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Bulb Replacement (cont.)Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-37Taillamps, TurnSignal,Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps . . . . 10-35, 10-36

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-65Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-60Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-1Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-11CheckEngine Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-31

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-51

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-59, 3-61, 3-62Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47Where to Put the Restraint . . .3-49

INDEX i-3

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Engine Temperature Gauge . . . 5-9

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

CoversCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Compartment/StoragePanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-23If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-26Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

i-4 INDEX

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39


Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Check and Service EngineSoon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . 5-9Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Cooling System Messages . . .5-23Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Engine (cont.)Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-41Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-3

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

FilterEngine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Flat Tire, Changing . . . .10-66, 10-75

FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-29, 9-46Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-66Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68

INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont.)Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-65Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-65Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64Requirements, California . . . . .9-65System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Fuel EconomyDriving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-85FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39


GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-17High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6HeaterEngine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-23Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-52Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

i-6 INDEX

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-44Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-12Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-59

Latch, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5LightingExit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-17Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . 5-9Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Locking Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

INDEX i-7

Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Transfer Case Vent Filter . . . . .9-46

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-12Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

MessagesBattery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-23Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Messages (cont.)Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-24Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

NNavigation SystemVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-42Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

i-8 INDEX

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-31

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-40Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-35Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-35

Power (cont.)Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54

Rear Compartment/StoragePanel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7, 3-9Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-60Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-3Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

INDEX i-9

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-42Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-27Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-25

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4

Seats (cont.)Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7, 3-9Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-84Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . 3-59, 3-61, 3-62

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-11Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

i-10 INDEX

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-40

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-30Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . 10-35, 10-36

Storage AreasCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Management System . . . 4-2Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storage Areas (cont.)Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Rear Compartment/StoragePanel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemRoof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

System CheckAutomatic TransmissionShiftlock Control . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . 10-35, 10-36

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-DeterrentSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66, 10-75Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-53Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-52Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Secondary Latch System . . . 10-84Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-63When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

INDEX i-11

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-70Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-78General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-70Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-90Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74Trailer Recommendations . . . .9-81Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-52Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

TrailerTowing Recommendations . . . .9-81

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74Transfer CaseVent Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . 10-35, 10-36

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-26Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Vent FilterTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

i-12 INDEX

WWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Where to Put the ChildRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-32WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

2010 HUMMER H3/H3T Owner Manual M - Chevrolet HUMMER H3/H3T Owner Manual M Service and Maintenance...

Documents

Transcript of 2010 HUMMER H3/H3T Owner Manual M - Chevrolet HUMMER H3/H3T Owner Manual M Service and Maintenance...